Skip to main content

Full text of "Painters, pictures and the people"

See other formats


A    ° 


•     VINMOJIWD  JO     ° 


o     AHSa3/\INn  3Hi    ° 


B 


/ 


J  BAR/ 


LIBRARY 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

SANTA  BARBARA 

PRESENTED  BY 

MR.    Sr  MRS.    HOWARD   FENTON 


1VS   o 


INfl  3H1     » 


m 


B 


o   SANTA  BARBARA   ° 


o    a: 


o    TH 


ur> 


Oj 


£ 


n 


JilVD  JO    o 


:alifornia 

J  1 

0  jo  xavaan  3Hi  ° 


W 


£Q 


/ 


as 


.-1B 


& 


S* 


°    SANTA   BARB  a: 


9 


£ 


5ft 


'llf.-l    5Hi      0 


PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND 
THE  PEOPLE 


PAINTERS,  PICTURES 
AND  THE  PEOPLE 


BY 

EUGEN  NEUHAUS 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  OF  DECORATIVE   DESIGN 
UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

LECTURER  ON  THE  HISTORY  AND  THEORY  OF  ART 
MILLS  COLLEGE,  CALIFORNIA 

AUTHOR  OF 

THE  ART  OF  THE  EXPOSITION 

THE  GALLERIES  OF  THE  EXPOSITION 

THE  SAN  DIEGO  GARDEN  FAIR 


WITH  THIRTY-TWO  ILLUSTRATIONS 


SAN  FRANCISCO 

PHILOPOLIS  PRESS 

MCMXVIII 


Copyright  191 8  by  Eugen  Neuhaus 


PRINTED  BY  PHILOPOLIS  PRESS 
SAN  FRANCISCO 


THE  ILLUSTRATIONS  IN  THIS  BOOK  HAVE 
BEEN  SELECTED  FROM  THE  FIELD  OF  CON- 
TEMPORARY AMERICAN  PAINTING  AND 
THE  AUTHOR  IS  INDEBTED  TO  THE  ARTISTS 
FOR  THEIR  KIND  PERMISSION  TO 
REPRODUCE    THEIR     WORK    HERE 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


Introduction  .... 

The  Significance  of  Art 

The  Artist's  versus  the  Public's  Point  of  View 

On  Composition. 

Balance  in  Pictures 

Rhythm  and  How  it  is  Attained    . 

Harmony  and  Unity 

What  Color  Means  to  an  Artist    . 

The  Technical  Development 

Changes  in  the  Aesthetic  Ideal     . 

The  Nude  in  Art    . 

On  Art  Patronage 

Hopes  for  American  Art. 


PAGE 

i 
10 
34 
56 
65 
78 
92 
105 
120 

l35 
159 
176 
194 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

Frontispiece — Art  and  Nature       .      .  facing  title 

Arthur  F.  Mathews,  San  Francisco,  California 

FACING    PAGE 

Plate  II — Five  O'clock  June 4 

Robert  Spencer,  A.  N.  A.,  New  Hope,  Pennsylvania 

Plate  III — Juan  Domingo  and  the  Bread  Jar  \i 

Victor  Higgins,  Chicago,  Illinois 

Plate  IV — The  Grove 16 

William  Wendt,  A.  N.  A.,  Los  Angeles,  California 

Plate  V — The  Red  Parasol 32 

George  Bellows,  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  VI — Youth  and  Sunshine 36 

Edward  Dufner,  A.  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  VII — The  Drinker 44 

Randall  Davey,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  VIII — The  Broken  Oak 48 

Francis  McComas,  Monterey,  California 

Plate  IX — A  Memento  of  Old  Madrid      ...       64 

Hovsep  Pushman,  Chicago,  Illinois 

Plate  X — Wind  on  the  Hills 68 

Wilson  H.  Irvine,  Chicago,  Illinois 

Plate  XI — Tanis 76 

Daniel  Garber,  N.  A.,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

Plate  XII — The  Haymakers 80 

Gottardo  Piazzoni,  San  Francisco,  California 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

FACING    PAGE 

Plate  XIII — Lydia 84 

Giovanni  Battista  Troccoli,  Newton  Center, Massachusetts 
Plate  XIV — California  Landscape       ....       92 
Carl  Oscar  Borg,  San  Francisco,  California 

Plate  XV — The  Family 96 

Ivan  Olinsky,  A.  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XVI — The  Sagebrush  Trail        ....     100 

Oscar  E.  Berninghaus,  St.  Louis,  Missouri 

Plate  XVII — Portrait 108 

Clarence  Hinkle,  Los  Angeles,  California 

Plate  XVIII — Afternoon 112 

Arthur  F.  Mathews,  San  Francisco,  California 

Plate  XIX — Despair 116 

Perham  W.  Nahl,  Berkeley,  California 

Plate  XX — At  Sunrise 124 

Jonas  Lie,  A.  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXI — Landscape 128 

Maurice  Braun,  Los  Angeles,  California 

Plate  XXII — At  the  Hippodrome 132 

Gifford  Beal,  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXIII — Monterey  Bay 140 

Bruce  Nelson,  Palo  Alto,  California 

Plate  XXIV — In  the  Valley 144 

Joseph  T.  Pearson,  Jr.,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

Plate  XXV — The  Storm 148 

Herman  Dudley  Murphy,  East  Lexington,  Massachusetts 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

FACING    PAGE 

Plate  XXVI — Portrait  of  Elmer  S.  Hader  .      .     156 
E.  Spencer  Macky,  San  Francisco,  California 

Plate  XXVII — The  Palace  of  Fine  Arts,  San 

Francisco,  California 160 

Colin  Campbell  Cooper,  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXVIII— Morning 164 

Norwood  H.  MacGilvary,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXIX — Carmel  Coast 172 

William  Ritschel,  N.  A.,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXX — What  an  Indian  Thinks       .      .      .     176 
Maynard  Dixon,  San  Francisco,  California 

Plate  XXXI — Lower  Manhattan 184 

Leon  Kroll,  New  York  City,  New  York 

Plate  XXXII — Sobrante  Vista 200 

Eugen  Neuhaus,  Berkeley,  California 


FOREWORD 


Th 


HESE  chapters  are  addressed  to  those  students 
of  art  who  form  the  great  majority  ordinarily  over- 
looked by  writers  on  the  arts.  Far  too  often, 
unfortunately,  so-called  higher  aesthetic  criticism  is 
attempted  when  simpler  ways  of  approach  would 
be  much  more  useful.  Many  books  on  art  are  over 
the  heads  of  the  masses,  and  all  readers  forgotten 
save  those  chosen  few  for  whose  favorable  opinion 
the  author  is  most  eager. 

All  the  topics  in  this  book  have  been  developed 
originally  in  speaking  to  classes  of  undergraduates  in 
the  University  of  California,  as  an  introduction  to  a 
course  in  the  general  history  of  modern  art,  and  in 
public  lectures  before  audiences  of  many  different 
types.  Dealing  constantly  in  a  practical  way  with 
many  people  of  little  technical  knowledge,  I  have 
found  that  it  is  a  mistake  to  take  too  much  for granted 
a  knowledge  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
aesthetic  appreciation.  This  book,  therefore,  is  an 
attempt  to  lay  foundations  for  a  general  apprecia- 
tion of  art  that  may  be  further  developed  according 
to  individual  ideals. 


INTRODUCTION 

IT  may  be  asserted  without  fear  of  contradic- 
tion that  no  art  activity  enlists  so  many  zealous 
admirers  as  the  profession  of  the  producer  of 
pictures.  Many  times  we  hear  at  art  exhibitions 
the  ingenuous  exclamations  of  enthusiastic  ap- 
preciators  who  think  they  would  give  much  if 
only  they  might  know  how  to  paint  a  picture. 
This  wistful  attitude  of  the  public  we  seldom 
find  extended  to  the  other  arts — music,  poetry, 
architecture,  sculpture.    No  other  art  seems  so 
universally  rated  as  the  essential  food  for  aesthetic 
satisfaction   as  painting.  Although   the   ability 
to  produce  works  of  art  is  denied  the  average 
mortal,  it  is  considered  a  solace  and  delight  to  be 
able  to  talk  about  pictures,  particularly  in  studio 
or  technical  terms.    To  own  an  oil  painting — 
even  if  of  dubious  quality — is  more  impressive  to 
the  multitude  than  the  possession  of  a  grand 
piano.  This  all  seems  very  encouraging,  and  one 
might  almost  believe  that  to  be  an  artist  is  to  be 
bedded  on  roses.    Unfortunately,  the  public  has 
some  very  positive  views  as  to  what  a  picture 


2      PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

should  be,  and  the  artist  puts  forth  some  others 
— often  very  contrary  to  those  of  the  public. 

This  incontrovertible  condition  at  once  places 
a  twofold  responsibility  upon  the  artist,  for, 
while  working  primarily  to  be  respected  in  his 
profession,  he  must  please  a  sometimes  very 
fickle  public  besides.  Take  some  other  artistic 
profession — that  of  the  architect,  for  instance — 
for  contrast;  the  architect  may  ignore  the 
public,  usually,  and  produce  entirely  for  the 
satisfaction  of  his  single  client  and  the  relatively 
small  number  of  his  fellow  architects.  It  is  dif- 
ferent with  the  painter.  It  is  very  perplexing,  to 
the  artist  and  public  alike,  that  their  two  judg- 
ments differ  so  widely — to  the  artist,  who  can- 
not understand  what  he  calls  the  whims  of  the 
public,  and  much  more  to  the  public,  which 
finds  only  very  few  painters  to  its  liking,  and 
then  not  always  those  the  profession  would  put 
on  a  pedestal. 

But  what  is  this  public,  and  is  it  worth  being 
taken  into  account  by  the  artist?  Of  the  small 
number  of  those  who  have  been  students  all  their 
lives  I  am  not  thinking,  nor  of  that  small  coterie 
of  those  equipped  with  the  same  artistic  in- 
stincts as  the  producing  artist,  although  without 


INTRODUCTION  3 

a  power  to  express  their  emotions  in  any  me- 
dium. We  speak  of  the  latter  as  the  people  with 
marked  artistic  perception;  we  speak  of  them  as 
connoisseurs.  They  do  not  themselves  produce, 
but  their  instinctive  judgment  has  made  them 
most  valuable  studio  aids  and  advisers  of  the 
artist.  When  they  are  blessed  with  this  world's 
goods,  they  are  angel  visitants  for  the  profes- 
sion, and  an  artist's  Utopia  would  not  be  possi- 
ble without  them.  These  people  with  artistic 
perception  are  essentially  of  the  same  kind  as  the 
producing  artist,  the  sole  difference  between  the 
two  existing  merely  in  artistic  productiveness  or 
unproductiveness.  However,  they  are  so  few 
and  far  between  that  as  a  class  they  neither  need 
nor  invite  any  attention — they  are  an  exception. 
But  let  us  pay  attention  to  that  rather  large, 
heterogeneous  mass  of  those  who  make  up  our 
exhibition  crowds  and  who  are  said  to  constitute 
the  backbone  of  our  civilization.  I  have  no  delu- 
sions about  the  number  of  those  who  wish  to  be 
able  to  respond  sympathetically  to  the  individ- 
ual appeal  of  the  painter.  Since  they  will  always 
be  in  the  majority,  it  is  doubly  necessary  that 
everything  possible  should  be  done  to  help  train 
their  instincts  into  the  channels  which  lead  to 


4      PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

real  appreciation  and  fullest  enjoyment.  That 
this  is  fundamentally  a  problem  of  education 
becomes  evident  when  one  discovers  that  dis- 
cerning appreciation  is  a  question  of  desire  plus 
knowledge  of  certain  principles  evolved  by  long 
usage  and  common  understanding. 

Of  all  the  many  perplexing  problems  of  educa- 
tion none  seems,  however,  more  discouraging 
than  that  of  bringing  artist  and  public  together 
upon  a  common  basis  of  mutual  understanding. 
To  allow  the  product  of  the  painter — his  pic- 
ture— to  be  the  sole  and  only  means  of  commu- 
nication— to  depend  upon  it  alone  to  produce 
enlightenment,  without  any  other  previous 
preparation  on  the  part  of  the  public,  neither  is 
nor  has  been,  to  all  appearances,  productive  of 
the  best  results.  The  chasm  still  remains,  and 
even  becomes  wider,  as  one  experimenting  age  of 
art  after  another  presents  new  problems  which 
the  public  seems  utterly  unprepared  to  receive 
with  interest,  or  even  with  respect. 

The  fact  that  among  the  well-to-do  an  under- 
standing of  artistic  efforts  is  more  widely  found 
than  among  the  masses  is  not  so  much  due  to  a 
keener  innate  instinct  or  artistic  perception  or 
inherited  tendencies  as  it  is  to  more  frequent 


'^(f*^t^: 


»  1 

1 

K 

1 1 

V  : 

13 

FIVE  O  CLOCK  JUNE 


PLATE  11 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Robert  Spencer,  A.  N.  A. 


INTRODUCTION  5 

opportunities  for  study,  and  experience  based  on 
more  intimate  acquaintance  with  art. 

The  great  masses  of  the  people  continue  to 
nurse  the  fond  belief  that  all  that  is  necessary  to 
settle  the  question  of  aesthetic  responsibility  is 
merely  to  express  a  personal  choice. 

It  is  a  curious  fact  that  many  people  who  have 
contributed  conspicuously  toward  a  more  gen- 
eral appreciation  of  pictures  are  often  from  out- 
side the  painter's  realm,  with  sometimes  no  other 
qualification  than  a  capacity  for  literary  expres- 
sion, and  possibly  a  generous  or  exuberant  imag- 
ination which  enables  them  to  endow  a  picture 
with  boundless  qualities  which  the  artist  in  his 
most  extravagant  dreams  never  conceived. 

The  artist  as  a  rule  is  so  discouraged  over  the 
literary  exploitation  of  the  children  of  his  muse 
that  he  has  become  resigned  to  his  fate  and  with 
grim  humor  accepts  what  he  cannot  change.  On 
the  whole  he  deserves  sympathy  in  a  predica- 
ment which  he  himself  has  not  brought  about, 
but  which,  on  the  other  hand,  he  generally  does 
not  attempt  to  change.  He  feels  that  after  all 
his  work  is  misinterpreted  by  people  who  are  on 
the  whole  more  interested  in  the  literary  mean- 
ing of  pictures  than  in  those  artistic  qualities  of 


6      PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

paintings,  dear  to  his  heart,  which  have  to  do 
with  line,  form,  colour,  and  their  disposition  in 
an  orderly  and  organized  fashion  on  the  basis  of 
certain  artistic  principles. 

The  application  of  these  principles,  rather 
than  a  knowledge  of  historical  events,  of  the 
physical  appearance  of  a  country,  of  the  charac- 
teristics of  a  person,  or  of  exterior  facts,  must  be 
the  real  test  of  the  artistic  merit  of  a  picture. 
Without  some  proper  understanding  of  technical 
procedures  and  an  understanding  of  some  of  the 
many  laws  of  design,  it  seems  to  me  very  hard 
to  make  any  progress  in  the  acquisition  of  what 
we  may  term  an  ability  to  judge  and  enjoy. 

Art  in  its  traditional  aspects,  as  represented 
in  painting,  is  dependent  for  its  success  largely, 
I  take  it,  upon  demonstrable  conditions  which 
in  a  great  measure  may  be  understood  by  any 
studious  person,  without  the  necessity  of  much 
technical  knowledge. 

Human  nature  prefers  to  be  guided  by  stand- 
ards in  almost  everything  else,  but  not  in  the 
consideration  of  pictures.  It  is  true  that  many 
of  the  working  rules  of  the  studio  are  very  sub- 
tle, and  scarcely  recognizable,  but  they  are 
present,  nevertheless,  in  any  good  picture.   The 


INTRODUCTION  7 

stubborn  attitude  of  most  painters  in  refusing  to 
take  the  public  into  their  confidence  does  not 
help  very  much.  The  minute  a  picture  is  exhib- 
ited and  has  become  the  common  property  of 
the  multitude,  the  artist,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
kindly  invited  to  retire  to  the  seclusion  of  his 
studio  and  allow  the  public  to  make  of  his  pic- 
ture whatever  it  pleases.  In  a  measure  that  is 
fair  enough,  since  a  picture  can  only  mean  to  a 
person  whatever  it  conveys  on  the  basis  of  what 
the  individual  beholder  is  able  to  get  out  of  it 
or  able  to  put  into  it. 

If  our  artists  would  devote  their  energies, 
now  too  often  spasmodically  applied  toward  edu- 
cating the  public  along  technical  lines  and  in  the 
principles  of  composition,  color  theory,  and  de- 
sign, they  would  doubtlessly  be  able  to  sell  more 
good  pictures  and  moreover  promote  their  own 
artistic  freedom  and  economic  independence. 

The  talking  artist  is  greatly  and  unjustly  de- 
spised, but  after  all  he  is  as  necessary  as  any 
person  who  through  educational  endeavors  takes 
the  public  into  the  inner  mysteries  of  the  hows 
and  wherefores  of  any  profession. 

It  is  safe  to  say  that  the  great  mass  of  artists 
do  their  work  instinctively.     They  dispose  of 


8      PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

line  and  form,  of  areas  and  colour,  according  to 
intuition,  and  they  are  rarely  able  to  explain 
the  reasons  any  further  than  to  say  that  theirs 
is  the  right  way.  The  most  obscure,  after  all,  is 
the  purely  technical  side  of  the  painter's  art, 
which  is  often  treated  with  a  secrecy  bordering 
on  mysteriousness;  but  it  is  no  more  subtle  than 
the  many  aesthetic  principles  which  have  been 
evolved  from  the  experience  of  the  past  and 
which  in  their  accumulation  are  alike  bewilder- 
ing and  baffling.  Our  American  interest  in  art 
has  certainly  become  phenomenal,  and  we  can 
no  longer  complain  of  lack  of  opportunities  for 
study  at  home.  But  so  long  as  the  interest  is 
focused  exclusively  upon  the  subject  matter 
and  little  concern  manifested  as  to  abstract 
artistic  qualities,  it  will  never  result  in  anything 
else  but  pseudo-expertship. 

Before  examining  the  working  principles  of 
art,  it  might  be  well  to  inquire  into  the  aims  of 
art,  and  its  objects  as  related  to  the  life  of  men. 
Since  art  is  not  based  merely  on  individual 
efforts,  but  on  broader  things  expressed  by  col- 
lective efforts  of  many  people,  its  significance  as 
a  part  of  civilization  becomes  evident.  To  lay  a 
liberal  foundation  for  an   appreciation  of  the 


INTRODUCTION  9 

aesthetic  manifestations  of  a  people,  one  has 
first  to  recognize  the  true  function  of  art  within 
a  civilization,  and  its  intimate  connection  with 
the  world  at  large. 

While  the  creating  of  what  we  call  the  beauti- 
ful will  always  remain  the  privilege  of  a  chosen 
few,  only  the  understanding  and  enjoyment  of 
art  by  the  masses  can  bring  about  an  ideal 
democracy. 


io     PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART 

1  HAT  the  meaning  of  art  is  an  enigma  to 
many  people  is  probably  due  in  part  to  its 
boundless  variety  of  occurrence,  and  in  part  to  a 
prevailing  ambiguity  in  the  use  of  the  term.  To 
furnish  a  concise  explanation  of  the  word,  other 
than  a  dictionary  definition,  would  be  very 
difficult,  and  one  is  reminded  in  this  predica- 
ment of  the  well-known  query — what  is  a  spiral? 
and  of  the  usual  movement  of  the  hands  in  an- 
swer. That  is  to  say,  we  all  know  what  is  under- 
stood by  art,  we  can  give  many  examples  to 
illustrate  what  we  mean,  but  we  falter  in  at- 
tempting any  direct  statement  of  its  meaning. 
To  the  artist,  the  thing  is  much  less  a  puzzle 
than  to  the  layman,  because  he  knows  that  if 
he  has  a  good  day,  whatever  he  may  do  is  ipso 
facto  art,  by  reason  of  his  possession  of  a  God- 
given  talent  for  producing  the  thing  we  call  art. 
For  the  convenience  of  the  public,  and  for 
philosophic  purposes,  art  has  been  defined  in 
many  ways,  all  in  the  last  analysis  expressing 
the  same  idea.   Art  is  essentially  the  expressing 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  u 

of  something  in  such  a  way  as  to  give  aesthetic 
pleasure.  It  is  the  significant  way  of  doing  a 
thing,  anything  that  might  be  ennobled  by  an 
improved  and  dignified  form  of  representation. 
Or,  as  in  the  case  of  satirical  or  humorous  expres- 
sion, the  primary  purpose  may  be  merely  char- 
acterization, or  the  heightening  of  some  phase 
of  self-realization,  rather  than  the  achieving  of 
what  is  ordinarily  thought  of  as  the  beautiful. 

We  have  learned  to  recognize  art  in  very 
many  forms  through  which  human  nature  grati- 
fies its  aesthetic  senses.  Thus  the  arts  are  di- 
vided into  the  aesthetic  or  fine  arts — the  free 
and  independent  arts  which  exist  entirely  for 
their  own  sake,  to  produce  beautiful  things — 
embracing  painting,  poetry,  the  drama,  sculp- 
ture, music,  the  dance;  the  dependent  arts, 
which  minister  primarily  to  some  utilitarian 
purpose,  like  architecture,  landscape  gardening, 
decoration,  ceramics,  the  goldsmith's  art,  and 
others.  The  so-called  fine  arts  seem  to  offer  the 
favorite  means  of  aesthetic  satisfaction  as  com- 
pared with  the  dependent  or  utilitarian  arts, 
which,  curiously  enough,  are  frequently  rated  as 
inferior  in  their  aesthetic  appeal. 

I  seriously  question  the  truth  of  this  common 


12    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

contention,  because  I  do  not  believe  that  the 
abstract  artistic  element  in  poetry,  painting,  or 
a  piece  of  sculpture  is  to  most  people  the  moving 
force  in  their  so-called  enjoyment,  but  rather 
the  pleasure  of  intellectual  satisfaction  in  con- 
templating the  subject  matter  involved.  To  the 
great  majority  of  people  the  pure  abstract 
beauty,  the  beauty  of  form,  line,  balance,  spac- 
ing, color,  composition,  and  what  not,  is  un- 
fortunately of  little  or  no  consequence.  Their 
approval  of  a  picture  is  almost  entirely  based  on 
the  acceptability  of  the  subject  matter,  which, 
if  intelligible,  and  better  yet,  of  a  moralizing, 
preaching  tone,  is  the  decisive  factor  in  causing 
them  to  pronounce  it  a  work  of  art.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  utilitarian  art  object — an  orien- 
tal rug  for  instance — does  not  necessarily  pos- 
sess the  quality  of  moving  our  intellect,  but  it 
may  bear  infinitely  more  of  real  art  meaning 
than  the  story-telling  picture.  But  we  shall  have 
to  devote  ourselves  to  this  very  important  sub- 
ject separately,  later  on,  and  return  for  a  time 
to  a  general  discussion  of  the  subject  of  art. 

Materially,  then,  painting,  the  less  abstract 
art,  as  contrasted  with  music  and  poetry,  has 
become   recognized    as   momentous    above   all 


JUAN  DOMINGO  AND  THE  BREAD  JAR 


PLATE  111 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Victor  Higgins 

Owned  by  the 

Cn  \    OF  t'HK  AGO 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  13 

other  arts — at  least  in  popular  favor.  One  must 
come  to  this  conclusion  when  one  hears  of  the 
common  classification  of  artist,  sculptor,  archi- 
tect, and  realizes  what  is  meant  by  it.  The  Ger- 
man language  is  more  fortunate  in  having  a  col- 
lective name  indicating  aesthetic  responsibili- 
ties— in  the  word  "Kiinstler."  The  three  repre- 
sentative artists — painter,  architect,..and  sculp- 
tor— are  collectively  "Kiinstler."  An  "artist" 
in  Germany  is  a  vaudeville  performer — one  who 
does  stunts,  turns  somersaults,  and  juggles  with 
a  variety  of  objects.  In  France  we  have  the 
"peintre  artiste"  as  the  supreme  being  of  aes- 
thetic ambitions,  with  the  architect  and  sculptor 
vying  for  a  close  second.  I  believe  this  sad  con- 
fusion of  terms  has  no  little  to  do  with  our  com- 
mon misunderstanding  of  the  meaning  of  art. 
Art  in  its  real  intent  must  mean  an  all-including 
comprehensive  unity  of  aesthetic  expression 
which  cannot  occur  in  isolation.  It  is  the  iso- 
lated and  over-specialized  expressions  of  art 
which  in  their  very  nature  are  artificial  and 
meaningless. 

The  greatest  period  of  art  we  know  of  is  that 
of  the  Greeks.  Their  whole  existence,  their 
various  ways  of  thinking  and  of  doing  things, 


14    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

their  whole  philosophy  of  life  was  guided  by  the 
dictates  of  the  laws  of  the  beautiful.  It  was  only 
under  such  unified  thought  that  they  could  pro- 
duce the  beautiful  simultaneously  in  literature, 
poetry,  the  drama,  sculpture,  and  architecture. 
Their  every  object  of  use  was  shaped  and  created 
with  the  same  thought  of  beautiful  expression  as 
their  more  monumental  artistic  productions. 
We  have  become  so  convinced  of  their  super- 
iority in  expressing  things  in  a  beautiful  way, 
that  nowadays  the  word  classic  has  become  the 
highest  praise  we  can  bestow  on  any  work  of  art. 
It  is  fortunate  that  at  so  early  a  date  in  recorded 
history  we  should  have  been  furnished  with  ex- 
pressions of  art  of  many  kinds  fit  to  become 
guiding  examples  for  later  civilization.  We 
possess  today  actual  specimens  of  their  art 
which  are  the  inspiration  of  all  artists  of  the 
present  time  and  which  bid  fair  not  to  be  sur- 
passed, nor  even  equalled,  particularly  in  sculp- 
ture and  architecture.  The  Greeks  have  given 
us  the  formula,  the  a,  b,  c,  by  which  we  could 
attempt  an  expression  of  our  own  civilization  in 
artistic  form.  It  is  true  enough  that  the  formula 
is  often  all  that  many  so-called  artists  ever 
recognize  in  Greek  art,  much  to  their  own  loss. 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  15 

Moreover,  the  Greeks  gave  us  the  fundamen- 
tal principle  of  idealization — the  means  of  ex- 
pressing ordinary  things  in  an  ennobled  way. 
Their  art  was  guided  primarily  by  an  under- 
standing of  the  fitness  of  things.  Their  cos- 
tumes, for  instance,  were  practical  and  beautiful 
alike,  and  conducive  to  a  normal  development  of 
their  bodies.  Their  vases,  urns,  and  vessels  gen- 
erally had  proportions  and  shapes  equally  fit 
for  use  and  beauty.  Their  architecture,  domes- 
tic and  monumental,  never  lost  sight  of  the  re- 
quirements of  simplicity  and  fitness,  and  became 
aesthetically  satisfactory  by  simplicity  and 
soundness  of  construction.  Simplicity  used  to 
stand  for  artistic  quality — but  how  we  have 
changed  nowadays!  The  over-ornate,  is  now 
readily  confused  with  the  artistic. 

All  we  seem  to  think  necessary  to  an  artistic 
atmosphere  nowadays  is  some  thousands  of  pic- 
tures. Though  evanescent,  marvelous  was  the 
beauty  of  the  architectural  ensemble  of  our  last 
great  exposition,  in  San  Francisco.  We  could 
not  say  enough  about  Jules  Guerin's  successful 
chromatic  treatment  of  the  finely-textured  tra- 
vertine surfaces  of  the  exhibition  palaces,  but 
when  it  came  to  "real  art,"  only  pictures  would 


1 6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

do.  Why  everlastingly  pictures,  and  why  not 
carpets,  wall-papers,  fountains,  interior  decora- 
tion, and  the  thousand  real  things  in  need  of 
artistic  formulation  and  expression?  The  great 
artist  of  by-gone  periods,  whether  architect  or 
sculptor,  would  smile  at  the  topsy-turviness  of 
our  modern  world  of  art,  which  too  often  begins 
at  the  top  and  works  toward  the  bottom.  Not 
only  is  the  public  obsessed  by  this  misguided 
pursuit,  nowadays,  but  very  frequently  artists 
show  condescension  rather  than  pride  in  turning 
their  interest  towards  basic  utilitarian  art,  after 
having  made  a  pathetic  fizzle  of  so-called  higher 
aspirations.  The  artist  nowadays  is  often  a  good 
example  of  inverted  methods  of  art,  beginning 
at  the  top  and  landing  heavily  at  the  bottom. 

We  may,  whenever  we  tire  of  Greek  examples, 
turn  our  thought  toward  another  great  country 
of  artists — to  Japan,  where  artistic  attention  to 
utilitarian  things  is  carried  farther  than  any- 
where else.  The  Japanese  artist,  while  his  archi- 
tecture is  not  monumental,  manifests  a  real 
capacity  for  artistic  expression  in  everything  he 
undertakes  to  enrich  in  form,  with  a  persistent 
regard  for  fitness  and  a  wonderful  individuality 
in  meeting  the  constructive  necessities  involved. 


THE  GROVE 


PLATE  IV 


Kniiii  the  Oil  Painting  l>y 
w  ii  1 1  \m  Wendt,  a.  n.  a. 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  17 

Japanese  sculpture  seldom  occurs  detached,  but 
more  often  as  an  embellishment  of  the  architec- 
tural forms.  And  as  for  pictures,  the  Japanese 
execute  many  important  pictures  on  screens. 
The  so-called  Japanese  prints  are  produced  semi- 
mechanically  to  satisfy  great  numbers  of  people 
at  little  cost.  Japanese  art,  unfortunately,  has 
never  impressed  the  great  masses  of  the  western 
world,  on  account  of  its  alleged  plebeian  scope — 
its  lack  of  exclusiveness.  I  venture  to  say  that  if 
fuller  understanding  of  the  Japanese  idea  of  art 
could  develop  in  our  country,  many  of  our  aes- 
thetic problems  would  solve  themselves. 

So  far,  art  with  us  is  in  danger  of  becoming 
the  exclusive  interest  of  the  well-do-to  by  being 
continually  restricted  to  pictures  which  become 
more  and  more  the  objects  for  speculative  finan- 
cial juggling  in  the  hands  of  owners  and  certain 
art  dealers  alike.  The  commercial  exploitation 
of  art  is  really  not  of  our  own  invention,  and  of 
no  significance  so  far  as  the  artistic  status  of 
this  country  is  concerned.  The  fact  that  some- 
body has  the  money  to  buy  a  Franz  Hals  for 
half  a  million  when  somebody  else  is  willing  to 
give  four  hundred  and  ninety-nine  thousand 
dollars  is  of  no  artistic  significance.    Only  when 


18    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

one  thinks  that  the  amount  of  money  invested 
that  way,  if  it  is  an  investment  at  all,  would  go 
a  long  way  toward  supplying  every  museum  in 
the  country  with  a  comprehensive  collection  of 
all  good  original  pottery  made  in  the  year  191 8 
in  these  United  States,  then  the  seriousness  of 
such  waste  becomes  at  once  most  apparent. 
But  who  cares  for  pottery  when  pictures  are 
heralded  as  the  paramount  concern?  That  we 
have  a  native  instinct  for  the  really  beautiful  is 
evident  enough  in  the  many  independent  efforts 
put  forth  with  true  creative  self-reliance  in  the 
field  of  the  decorative  arts. 

Since  the  very  early  days  of  American  art,  it 
has  been  paintings  first,  then  sculpture  and 
architecture.  The  demand  for  purely  sentimen- 
tal reasons,  for  pictures  of  our  distinguished 
citizens  called  for  the  service  of  the  portrait 
painter,  and  many  collections  of  so-called  colon- 
ial portraits  shows  that  the  prevailing  lack  of 
appreciation  of  artistic  quality  in  everything 
else  could  not  very  well  lead  to  anything  better 
than  those  wooden,  stupid,  front-parlor  chromos. 
There  were  exceptions,  like  Gilbert  Stuart,  and 
possible  a  few  lesser  men.  Gradually  artistic 
expression  in  utilitarian  things,  largely  in  archi- 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART 


*9 


tecture,  brought  about  a  more  genuine  native 
artistic  capacity,  which  in  the  meantime  has  be- 
come applied  to  other  artistic  interests  and 
which  at  present  promises  far  to  outstrip  the 
progress  of  architecture  in  this  country. 

The  use  of  the  classic  formula  is  the  right 
thing  in  the  student  atelier,  but  when  it  is  per- 
sisted in,  and  merely  used  as  a  lifeless  rule,  it 
becomes  distressing.  The  great  architectural 
performances  at  the  Panama-Pacific  Interna- 
tional Exposition  were  all  classic  in  formula, 
but  not  always  so  in  spirit.  The  difference  be- 
tween a  mere  receipt  and  an  ability  to  build  up 
on  a  classic  foundation  new  constructive  forms 
in  architecture  is  ever  recognized  by  the  lay- 
man. Bernard  Maybeck's  Fine  Arts  Palace  and 
Louis  Mullgardt's  Court  of  Abundance  were  im- 
posing and  uplifting  to  the  multitude,  although 
very  few  could  give  any  direct  reasons  for  their 
convictions.  The  great  Court  of  the  Universe,  « 
on  the  other  hand,  with  all  its  immensity,  was 
like  an  arctic  sea  in  its  coldness. 

Real  art  must  be  the  expression  of  an  original 
experience,  and  not  a  repetition  of  an  historical 
style.  In  many  ways  the  art  of  this  country  has 
so  far  only  just  started  to  assert  its  native  force, 


20    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

only  just  dared  to  throw  off  the  restraint  under 
which  it  has  labored,  unable  to  realize  its  own 
impulses.  The  art  of  the  Greek  was  based  on  a 
noble  civilization,  a  young  and  vigorous  state. 
When  it  was  bodily  transported  to  Italy,  it  did 
not  thrive  as  abundantly  as  at  home,  because  it 
was  borrowed,  and  grafted  on  an  alien  root. 
Secondly,  the  creative  instinct  was  not  present, 
to  carry  on  to  higher  individual  Roman  expres- 
sion what  had  come  from  a  people  only  slightly 
related.  It  is  true  that  the  decorative  element  in 
architecture  and  sculpture  was  much  accen- 
tuated during  the  Roman  period,  sacrificing, 
however,  that  classic  simplicity  for  ornateness, 
and  not  always  to  the  gain  of  the  work. 

We  find  in  the  Renaissance  proof  of  the  neces- 
sity for  individual  creative  genius  in  a  people 
for  the  production  of  true  art.  The  artistic 
a,  b,  c,  so  to  speak,  was  very  much  the  same 
after  it  had  once  been  laid  down  by  the  Greeks — 
or  possibly  by  the  Egyptians.  There  is  little 
difference  in  the  artistic  formula  of  the  Greek, 
that  of  the  old  Romans,  and  that  of  the  Renais- 
sance. But  the  spirit,  the  enthusiasm,  the  tem- 
perament of  the  great  Greek  masters  is  found 
again  in  the  leaders  of  the  Renaissance.    It  was 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  21 

not  merely  a  physical  revival  of  old  forms,  or  a 
direct  transplanting  of  their  artistic  products, 
as  in  the  earlier  days  of  Roman  splendor.  It  was 
something  totally  different.  It  was  a  desire  to 
realize  an  aesthetic  ideal  while  dealing  with 
local  conditions.  The  Renaissance  artist  could 
not  copy  any  palaces  from  Greek  models  to  line 
his  canals.  He  could  not  absolutely  shape  his 
sculpture  after  great  patterns  of  the  past.  His 
paintings  were  the  first  of  their  kind.  But  the 
spirit  which  guided  a  Phidias  must  have  lived 
in  Michael  Angelo,  Leonardo,  and  Raphael.  Is 
there  anywhere  a  more  convincing  example  than 
Leonardo  of  the  all-comprising  meaning  of  art, 
when,  in  his  letter  to  Ludovico  Sforza,  after 
dwelling  on  his  capacity  as  military  engineer  and 
his  ability  to  construct  cannon  and  scaling-lad- 
ders, and  mortars  and  engines  of  beautiful  and 
useful  shape,  he  concludes,  "In  time  of  peace  I 
believe  I  can  equal  anyone  in  architecture  in 
constructing  public  and  private  buildings  and  in 
conducting  water  from  one  place  to  another.  I 
can  execute  sculpture,  whether  in  marble,  bronze 
or  terra  cotta,  and  in  painting  I  can  do  as  much 
as  any  other,  be  he  who  he  may  be.  Further  I 
could  engage   to  execute   the  bronze  horse  in 


22    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

eternal  memory  of  your  father  and  the  illus- 
trious house  of  Sforza." 

It  was  this  ability  to  turn  anything,  like 
magic,  from  something  without  meaning,  with- 
out form,  into  something  beautiful,  that  charac- 
terizes the  true  artist.  It  is  the  universality  of 
art  which  alone  can  transform  a  country  from 
pseudo-artistic  into  a  civilization  of  true  artistic 
significance.  The  isolated  artistic  expressions 
may  exist  by  accident,  but  the  feeling  of  artistic 
unity  will  never  spring  from  "the  narrow  chan- 
nels of  one-sided  goodness."  It  has  ever  been  so 
when  great  things  were  done. 

The  Renaissance  shines  in  the  brilliance  of  its 
many  versatile  men  who  were  never  too  proud 
to  turn  their  hand  to  the  beautification  of  utili- 
tarian things.  The  foolish  classification  of  fine 
and — shall  be  say  "unfine"  artists,  is  the  great 
mistake  of  the  age.  Many  so-called  artists  of  the 
Renaissance  might  be  called  artisans  today,  by 
reason  of  the  subject  matter  of  their  work,  al- 
.  though  their  manner  of  work  might  be  superior  to 
many  modern  so-called  artists.  One  of  the  most 
hopeful  signs  in  our  country  is  presented  by  the 
constantly  increasing  employment  of  our  so- 
called  artist  sculptors  in  what  they  themselves 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  23 

unfortunately  often  call  commercial  work.  Pecu- 
liarly it  often  is  their  best,  because  it  is  the  kind 
of  work  their  instinct  tells  them  is  based  on  a 
logical  condition.  Fortunately,  also,  our  paint- 
ers have  come  more  and  more  into  contact  with 
native  necessities,  particularly  in  the  fields  of 
mural  decoration  and  illustration. 

Few  people  have  any  conception  of  the  boon 
that  the  desire  for  illustrated  reading  matter  has 
been  to  the  painter-illustrator  who  has  the  gift, 
unfortunately  too  rare,  of  creative  instinct  and 
feeling  for  design.  It  is  in  this  typical  field  of 
art  that  we  have  so  early  developed  a  higher 
quality  recognized  throughout  the  world  as  a 
genuine  American  accomplishment.  Such 
names  as  Howard  Pyle,  Maxfield  Parrish,  Jules 
Guerin,  are  typical  of  our  achievement  in  that 
field.  So  many  are  content  with  the  mere  copy- 
ing of  nature  that  any  arbitrary  problem  such 
as  illustrating  throws  them  off  their  feet. 

It  is  always  a  sign  of  improvement  to  have 
artistic  energies  turned  towards  utilitarian  prob- 
lems. I  remember  very  well  the  sensation  of  my 
early  student  days  in  Berlin  when  Otto  Eckman 
arrived  from  Munich  to  take  over  his  classes  in 
decorative  painting,  after  having  said  a  fond 


24    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

farewell  to  picture-painting  in  Munich.  His 
announcement  to  the  profession  in  those  late 
nineties  created  a  sensation.  Having  become 
utterly  disgusted  with  painting  innumerable — 
but  nevertheless  excellent — pictures  for  pur- 
poses always  to  be  determined  later  on,  he  de- 
cided to  separate  himself  at  once  for  good  and 
all  from  the  last  vestige  of  his  easel  painting, 
and  forthwith  proceeded  to  design  and  paint 
only  directly  useful  things.  His  work  as  a 
teacher  of  design,  cut  short  as  it  was  by  an 
early  death,  was  surely  more  far-reaching  than 
his  most  interesting  and  successful  pictures.  The 
whole  movement  in  Europe  erroneously  labeled 
"Art  Nouveau"  is  based  on  a  recognition  of  the 
idea  of  the  utilitarianism  of  art  and  the  idea  of 
getting  away  from  the  classic  formula  and  de- 
veloping a  classic  spirit.  It  is  this  spirit  that 
must  take  hold  of  us  before  we  can  hope  to  have 
a  real  American  art. 

The  protest  that  William  Morris  voiced  for 
his  time,  should  be  doubly  appreciated  in  our 
own  country — more  so  here  than  anywhere  else. 
His  demand  for  an  art  which  concerned  itself 
with  the  fundamental  necessities  was,  I  think, 
well  founded,  and  he  started  the  snowball  which 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  25 

developed  into  the  avalanche  of  modern  art, 
which  bids  fair  to  replace  entirely  the  formalism 
which  has  held  the  world  since  the  Renaissance. 
It  is,  of  course,  so  tempting  to  go  along  in  the 
old  way,  so  much  more  convenient,  less  strenu- 
ous in  every  sense.  To  what  silly  conditions  this 
never-ending  re-use  of  old  artistic  forms  can  go 
is  well  illustrated  in  the  case  of  the  acanthus. 
In  an  arid  country  like  Greece,  it  was  one  of  the 
few  indigenous  naturalistic  forms  presenting 
itself  to  the  native  architect-designer  for  deco- 
rative purposes.  And  how  they  made  use  of  it, 
understanding  fully  its  wonderful  decorative  and 
organic  constructive  possibilities.  The  Romans 
used  it  with  even  greater  decorative  force.  On 
its  reappearance  in  the  Renaissance — it  is  still 
recognizable,  though  often  merely  copied  as  an 
almost  abstract  ornament.  Its  use  in  northern 
Europe  became  more  and  more  imitative,  and 
eventually  devoid  of  real  character,  until  ulti- 
mately one  has  the  feeling,  particularly  during 
the  end  of  the  last  century,  that  many  archi- 
tects, sculptors,  and  decorative  designers  hardly 
knew  whether  the  acanthus  was  an  animal  or  a 
plant.  They  simply  copied  it  in  never-ending 
monotony,  having  no  chance  of  seeing  it  grow 


26    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

since  it  is  not  indigenous  to  northern  Europe. 
And  with  the  acanthus,  other  things  became 
similarly  amorphous.  Artistic  expression  must 
be  based  on  a  personal  emotion,  experience,  per- 
sonal observation.  No  matter  how  clever  the 
physical  form  may  be,  it  must  possess  the  spirit 
of  the  thing.  Our  period  imitations  all  suffer 
from  the  absence  of  real  underlying  experience. 
No  matter  how  well  done,  they  are  generally 
devoid  of  that  fitness  of  things  which  is  essential 
in  art. 

The  Renaissance  artist  who  rebelled,  first 
quietly,  then  openly,  against  a  transplantation 
of  Gothic  art  into  Italy,  did  so  because,  while  he 
may  have  been  sensitive  to  its  beauty,  he  must 
have  felt  that  such  architecture,  such  steep 
roofs,  such  fragile,  lacy  walls,  were  not  well 
adapted  to  southern  European  conditions.  The 
decorative  forms  of  the  Gothic  were  all  foreign 
to  Italian  eyes.  The  oak,  the  maple,  were  nor- 
thern, and  his  sympathies  were  all  with  the 
palm  and  the  laurel  and  the  olive.  The  classical 
architecture  persisted,  however,  even  where 
Gothic  had  gained  its  strongest  foothold,  and 
still  persists,  particularly  in  this  country,  where 
architecture  as  a  national  school  has  made  little 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  27 

advance.  Who  does  not  contemplate  with  mixed 
feelings  the  innumerable  St.  Peter's  domes 
which  have  become  the  architectural  pieces  de 
resistance  in  every  state  capitol  and  county  seat 
from  the  northeast  to  the  southwest?  This 
sorry  self-complacency  in  repetition  is  not  by 
any  means  from  a  lack  of  originality  among  our 
leading  architects.  It  is  simply  a  strict  adher- 
ence to  a  recognized  standard  form.  Although 
some  of  these  domes  are  very  lofty,  very  noble, 
none  serve  a  practical  purpose.  There  is  never 
anything  housed  inside  them.  They  are  purely 
ornamental,  and  for  that  reason  might  have 
been  done  just  as  well  in  some  other  form — 
some  new  form  sprung  afresh  from  a  new  oppor- 
tunity. Some,  like  the  new  San  Francisco  City 
Hall,  are  beautiful  in  their  fine-scaled,  jewelry- 
like ornamentation,  and  their  successful  per- 
sonal note,  the  note  which  alone  can  save  such 
a  building  from  commonplaceness.  Their  prac- 
tical purpose  is  to  serve  as  the  physical  emphasis 
of  the  center  of  the  city  business.  In  some  cities, 
particularly  abroad,  this  has  been  done  with 
much  greater  originality.  I  am  afraid  my  hopes 
of  ever  having  an  architect  confer  the  honor 
upon   me  of  executing   a   mural   painting  will 


28    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

dwindle  away  if  T  do  not  leave  architecture 
alone — a  field  I  cheerfully  abandoned  in  my  early 
days,  on  account  of  a  very  violent  and  healthy 
antipathy  for  mechanical  drawing.  However, 
architecture  is,  so  to  speak,  the  supreme  factor 
in  artistic  production.  At  least  it  ought  to  be 
that,  for  one  is  constantly  looking  for  relief  in 
that  quarter  rather  than  to  the  other  arts.  It  is 
true  we  have  the  skyscraper,  as  our  original 
architectural  contribution — but  what  of  its 
artistic  merit?  The  older  type  was  seldom  beau- 
tiful in  proportion.  Some  of  the  latter-day 
towers,  like  the  Woolworth  Building,  are  inspir- 
ing as  masterpieces  of  rhythm.  Collectively, 
standing  among  them  in  lower  New  York,  they 
are  very  ineffective  decoratively.  They  impress 
one  only  after  one  hears  of  their  cost  and  size. 
Our  engineers  are  doing  a  good  deal  better. 
Many  modern  engineering  feats  of  this  country 
are  both  artistic  and  original.  The  judicious  use 
of  concrete  and  steel  in  dams,  bridges,  and 
buildings,  often  entirely  without  any  so-called 
architectural  embellishments,  is  astounding.  A 
bridge  like  the  Lindenthal  span  over  the  East 
river  is  a  wonder  of  proportion,  of  rhythmic 
space  and  line  work,  and  it  will  bring  us  more 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  29 

praise  from  competent  art  critics  in  Europe 
than  many  thousands  of  our  pictures.  In 
engineering  we  are  really  on  the  right  track,  in 
a  profession  which  was  never  before  even 
counted  as  an  art,  and  which  has  existed  only 
as  a  necessary  adjunct  to  architecture,  losing  its 
identity  under  an  architectural  cover. 

In  our  decorative  arts  we  can  hardly  be  ex- 
pected to  have  done  better  than  Europe  up  to 
the  beginning  of  the  "art  nouveau."  Our  jig- 
saw-ornamented modern  buildings  are  not  a  bit 
more  mid-victorian  than  similar  monstrosities 
of  Europe  up  to  the  eighties.  The  triumph  of 
planing-mill  machinery  has  had  its  day,  and  the 
healthy  growth  of  the  new  decorative  art  move- 
ment abroad  has  already  spread  to  us  and  taken 
root  here  in  America.  We  are  beginning  to  recog- 
nize art  in  the  minor  things.  We  are  actually 
holding  exhibitions  of  the  "useful  arts,"  which 
I  believe  is  meant  to  denote  the  work  of  useful 
artists  in  contradistinction  to  the  "useless  arts," 
by  the  useless  artists.  I  admit  the  logic  of  this 
classification,  originated  by  the  Chicago  Insti- 
tute of  Art,  which  now  holds  annually  an  exhi- 
bition of  the  useful  decorative  arts,  followed  by 
the  annual  display  of  American  fine  arts,  by 


jo    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

which  must  be  meant  the  work  of  the  useless 
artists.  I  admit  I  have  been  one  of  them,  but 
only  by  necessity,  since  I  cannot  get  enough 
people  to  buy  my  book  plates  and  other  useful 
things,  and  I  do  occasionally  sell  an  easel  painting. 
We  are  finding  ourselves.  Our  native  talent 
is  too  genuine  not  to  realize  quickly  our  true 
artistic  necessities,  and  pictures  may  well  be 
the  very  last  of  them.  This  question  of  artistic 
self-realization  is  just  as  important  to  a  nation 
as  to  the  individual,  and  naturally  can  be  ac- 
complished only  by  the  individual's  beginning 
— and  very  many  are  beginning,  fortunately. 
There  is  first  of  all  the  use  of  the  native  raw 
materials  of  wood,  stone,  marble,  the  response 
to  the  many  new  forms  in  nature  available  for 
ornamental  purposes.  Then  there  is  the  develop- 
ment of  minor  styles  of  constructive  beauty,  as, 
for  instance,  the  so-called  Mission  furniture. 
Rightly,  it  is  no  decorative  style  at  all.  It  re- 
frains from  using  any  period  forms  of  European 
origin.  It  is  content  to  be  plain  and  devoid  of 
any  curlycues  and  dewjiggers  and  is  just  plain 
American.  It  will  always  be  in  style,  because  it 
was  never  out  of  style,  possessing  no  decorative 
ornamental  feature  of  any  kind.    Its  charm  is 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  ji 

entirely  in  its  proportion  and  utility.  But  one 
thing  we  can  say  for  it,  it  did  not  come  from 
Paris  or  London.  It  is  child  of  America  by 
reason  of  its  rigid  construction,  simplicity,  and 
common  sense,  which  an  engineer  might  have 
thought  out. 

The  shrine  of  worship  of  things  beautiful  in 
the  average  house  undoubtedly  will  continue  to 
be  the  "front  parlor,"  that  mysterious  museum 
of  miscellaneous  monstrosities.  I  have  a  parlor 
myself,  but  I  call  it  a  living-room,  because  I 
spend  all  my  time  in  it,  and  feel  comfortable  in 
it  besides.  I  have  no  "parlor"  because  I  can 
use  all  of  the  things  in  my  living-room  without 
fear  of  destruction.  Too  often  the  parlor  is  the 
sacred  temple  of  art,  of  an  art  which  is  ludi- 
crous, useless,  and  therefore  pseudo.  Why  is 
everything  in  the  parlor  so  artistic  just  because 
you  generally  can't  use  it? — Gold  chairs  you 
can't  sit  on — vases  you  can't  put  flowers  in  be- 
cause they  tip  over  if  you  fill  them  with  water — 
chandeliers  obscured  by  superfluous  ornament 
which  will  not  give  enough  light  but  which  are 
crushing  with  their  weight  of  hollow  metal,  and 
many  other  things  too  numerous  to  mention. 
We  are  often  perfectly  content  to  sacrifice  the 


32    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

front  parlor  to  silly  conventionality  so  long  as 
we  are  permitted  to  enjoy  life  in  other  parts  of 
the  house.  Besides,  the  pictures  hang  in  the 
parlor,  and  that  is  of  some  moment.  I  really 
wanted  to  speak  of  these  if  it  has  not  become 
evident  by  this  time  that  this  book  is  merely  a 
disguised  plea  for  something  else  but  pictures. 
I  regret  that  I  find  myself  spreading  iconoclastic 
ideas  when  I  am  producing  pictures  myself. 
However,  I  am  willing  to  suffer  the  conse- 
quences of  the  betrayal  of  confidence  of  a  de- 
ceived reader. 

Art,  then,  must  exist,  must  express  itself  in 
every  conceivable  part  of  our  physical  surround- 
ings, before  the  easel  picture  has  any  claim  upon 
recognition.  Sad  and  unprofessional  as  this  may 
seem,  coming  from  one  who  has  himself  engaged 
in  the  struggle  for  pictorial  expression,  it  is 
nevertheless  true,  and  the  development  of  our 
own  art  will  again  show  its  logic.  The  funda- 
mental requirement  of  all  art  is  necessity.  Art 
is  the  expression  of  emotion  or  passion  in  many 
mediums — not  one  alone — to  appeal  to  our  aes- 
thetic senses.  One  cannot  emphasize  this  too 
much  in  the  light  of  the  modern  predilection  for 
pictures,  which  almost  amounts  to  passion,  kept 


THE   RED   PARASOL 


PLATE  V 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
George  Hi  i  LOWS,  N.  A. 
Owned  by 
1)K.  W,  C.  WARD,  New  York. 


THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  ART  33 

at  fever  heat  by  the  fascination  of  the  specula- 
tive monetary  value  of  paintings.  The  great 
art  of  any  day  must  offer  clear  insight  into  the 
civilization  upon  which  it  is  based.  It  must 
become  the  truthful  record  by  which  future  gen- 
erations may  judge  the  humaneness  of  their 
forefathers.  An  art  showing  merely  skill  can 
never  be  really  alive — it  will  impress  only  as 
a  feat. 


34    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


THE  ARTIST'S  VERSUS  THE  PUBLIC'S 
POINT  OF  VIEW 

WHAT  is,  after  all,  the  criterion  which  guides 
the  painter  in  his  endeavor  to  express  himself  in 
his  particular  medium?  Looking  at  large  num- 
bers of  pictures,  as  any  exhibition  permits,  one 
feels  that  few  painters  themselves  know  what 
they  were  about,  but  curiously  enough  the  few 
painters  who,  according  to  the  profession,  are 
entirely  in  the  wrong  are  frequently  the  pets  of 
the  masses.  The  new  lights  in  the  profession  are 
seldom  immediately  recognized  as  such  by  the 
public,  and  it  is  only  after  the  trusted  connois- 
seur has  spoken  that  the  public,  eager  to  be  on 
the  safe  side,  dutifully  adopts  his  opinion — and 
the  rest  is  easy.  What  the  great  mass  of  people 
would  do  with  an  unexplained  collection  of  pic- 
tures can  very  easily  be  imagined — not  least 
from  the  results  of  the  popular  voting  contests 
often  held  throughout  the  country  in  art  gal- 
leries of  miscellaneous  character.  The  greatest 
number  of  votes  will  go  to  some  trivial  picture, 
while  the  real  canvas,  with  a  lasting  message  of 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW  35 

beauty,  is  generally  overlooked.  This  common 
occurrence  calls  for  immediate  reference  to  a 
contention  which  every  one  will  ultimately 
acknowledge  as  basic,  namely,  the  artist's  dis- 
crimination between  those  paintings  which  agi- 
tate only  our  temporary,  our  fleeting  passions, 
and  those  which  engage  our  interest  perma- 
nently, by  reason  of  their  appeal  to  our  more 
constant  emotions.  The  former,  owing  to  their 
nature,  often  enlist  our  attention  more  promptly 
than  the  latter.  It  is  a  common  experience 
of  many  people  on  longer  acquaintance  with 
large  numbers  of  pictures,  as  at  any  long-term 
Exposition,  to  change  their  affection  from  the 
first  to  the  second  type  and  this  is  a  most  signifi- 
cant and  encouraging  symptom.  The  artist  has 
relegated  the  lighter  kind  to  the  illustrator,  who 
cannot  afford  to  interrupt  the  thread  of  the 
story  any  longer  than  necessary  to  emphasize  a 
passing  point.  However,  it  does  not  follow  that 
illustration  is  not  art,  though  in  a  certain  sense 
it  is  an  inferior  art  owing  to  its  restrictions.  The 
illustrative  picture  is  generally  the  most  suc- 
cessful in  capturing  the  attention  of  exhibition 
visitors,  but  it  will  invariably  be  supplanted  in 
the  affections  of  those  capable  of  more  serious 


36    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

thoughts  by  the  at  first  less  appealing  picture  of 
the  latter  type. 

Beauty  seems  to  be  found  by  most  people  only 
in  the  painting  which  most  closely  approximates 
photographic  truth.  The  popular  fallacy  that  it 
is  difficult  to  attain  this  goal  is  stubbornly  main- 
tained. If  that  be  right,  then  why  not  apply 
this  fixed  belief  to  music  and  literature,  for  the 
sake  of  consistency.  If  literal  truthfulness  is  art, 
then  why  does  not  a  faithful  repetition  of  the 
sounds  of  the  birds  result  in  what  we  call  music, 
and  why,  on  the  other  hand,  does  not  a  merely 
painstakingly  accurate  account  of  some  event  in 
itself  most  interesting,  observed  on  the  street 
and  reported  by  a  newspaper  man,  count  as 
literature?  It  must  be  obvious,  if  consistency  of 
application  of  the  same  principle  is  helpful  at 
all  in  an  attempt  at  analysis,  that  art  as  ex- 
pressed in  painting  must  consist  of  something 
else. 

Many  paintings,  and  these  are  a  goodly  num- 
ber, are  scarcely  art  and  merely  imitation  of  a 
fact,  rendered  correctly  but  without  a  fragment 
of  suggestive  power,  of  those  finer  elements  that 
open  avenues  of  beauty,  and  give  the  thrills  of 
aesthetic  enjoyment  which  only  an  imaginative 


Vi**$t*'«*»*<-,-«'»*< 


i 


■ 

■»_■=■*  - 

YOUTH  AND  SUNSHINE 


PLATE  VI 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Edward  Dufner,  A.  N.  A. 

Owned  by 

Mrs.  J,  Henry  Dick,  New  Yi>rk 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLIC'S  POINT  OF  VIEW   37 

and   creative   artist   can   give.      Unfortunately 
many  painters,  by  reason  of  temperamental  im- 
potence, see  the  world  as  any  ordinary  person 
would,  which  oftentimes  accounts  for  their  popu- 
larity; while  the  susceptible  painter  leaves  the 
mere  physical   fact   far  behind  him   and  soars 
above  the  heads  of  the  common  herd  in   the 
visual  expression  of  his  imaginative  fancy.    To 
keep  up  with  the  former  is  not  a  hard  task,  but 
the  number  of  those  privileged  to  accompany 
the  latter  is  unfortunately  very  limited.   It  does 
not  seem  to  be  so  impossible  as  many  artists 
think  to  add  materially  to  the  latter  class  if 
people  could  be  made  more  serious  and  studious 
in   their   attitude   toward   pictures.      The   real 
artist,  then,  endeavors  to  lead  us  into  an  atmos- 
phere which  is  distinctively  his  own,  and  which 
differs  with  every  creative  individuality.    I  feel 
very  strongly  that  only  the  creative  artist,  who 
can  bring  to  us  things  which  are  not  an  every- 
day feature  of  the  world  at  large,  is  at  all  worthy 
of  permanent  consideration.    The  pathetic  ex- 
perience is  all  too  frequent  of  the  painter  who 
after  much  painstaking  toil  in  an  art  school  over 
methods  largely  technical  thinks  that  the  worst 
has  now  been  conquered,  and  then  comes  face 


j8    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

to  face  with  the  necessity  of  saying  something 
in  his  acquired  language.  The  number  of  those 
who  paint  well,  who  can  reproduce  a  fact  clearly 
in  paint  dexterously  employed,  is  always  large. 
But  the  company  of  the  real  creative  painter 
will  always  be  limited.  The  surface  of  this  earth, 
with  all  its  many-sided  aspects,  its  multi-colored 
people,  its  illimitable  fauna  and  flora,  is  open  to 
all  painters  on  the  same  basis.  Only  a  few,  how- 
ever, will  tell  what  they  have  seen  and  felt  in 
such  a  way  as  to  be  vital,  interesting,  original, 
and  at  the  same  time  intelligible. 

It  is,  however,  necessary  to  learn  that  the 
picturesque  and  the  paintable  ought  to  be  recog- 
nized as  two  totally  different  things.  Many  a 
painter  has  contemplated  the  ideal  state  which 
would  result  if  the  public  were  inclined  to  feel 
in  this  matter  as  he  does.  People  outdoors  are 
continually  seeing  marvelous  pictures  which  to 
their  disappointment  do  not  stir  the  artist  at  all. 
Most  often  artists  are  painfully  bored  by  the 
jubilant  descriptions  by  their  friends  of  scenery 
which  the  art-loving  layman  advises  them  to 
paint. 

The  hunting-grounds  of  the  landscape  painter 
are  scarcely  ever  to  be  found  on  the  highway  of 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW   jp 

tourist  travel.  If  they  are,  it  is  often  the  artist 
and  his  product  which  has  made  the  place  at- 
tractive to  the  public,  and  not  the  place  itself. 
The  great  western  scenery  in  which  we  Cali- 
fornians  are  so  rich,  the  lofty  mountains,  the 
deep  gorges,  the  groves  of  enormous  trees,  do 
not  attract  our  serious  painters  half  so  much  as 
the  quiet  caves  of  our  coasts,  the  flat  marshes, 
and  the  more  placid  phases  of  out-of-doors. 

To  be  interesting  and  original  without  being 
intelligent  is  of  course  very  easy,  as  some  of  our 
recent  exploitations  in  Post  Impressionism  of  so- 
called  Cubism  and  Futurism  have  successfully 
demonstrated.  If  to  be  interesting  means  to 
attract  attention  or  curiosity,  a  certain  type  of 
recent  art  leaves  nothing  to  be  wished  for.  If 
originality  means  merely  to  be  different,  we  have 
produced  of  late  masterpieces  that  it  will  be 
hard  to  surpass. 

It  is  interesting  to  bear  this  in  mind,  because 
it  proves  the  artist's  contention  that  the  spec- 
tacular appeal  of  the  emotional  productions  of 
nature,  her  more  violent  architecture,  makes  no 
such  lasting  imprint  upon  our  mind  as  do  as- 
pects of  nature  more  leisurely  produced,  more 
quiet  and  more  calm.     Aside  from  that,  the 


4o    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

problem  of  scale  representation  the  artist  has 
found  almost  impossible.  Few  people  realize  the 
impossibility  of  preserving  on  a  small  canvas 
that  oppressive  feeling  of  size  which  one  experi- 
ences at  the  base  of  a  great  mountain,  or  at  the 
bottom  or  the  brink  of  a  vast  chasm.  This  has 
been  tried  by  many  energetic  and  equally  mis- 
guided painters,  over  and  over  again,  but  never 
with  complete  success.  Some  painters,  like 
Thomas  Hill  in  a  large  canvas  of  the  Yosemite 
Valley,  in  the  Crocker  Art  Gallery  at  Sacramento, 
have  come  very  near  to  it,  and  another  western 
veteran  of  the  brush,  C.  D.  Robinson,  in  his 
earliest  very  spontaneous  sketches  of  the  same 
region  has  gone  further  than  any  western 
painter. 

However,  the  average  painter  turns  to  quiet 
things.  Waterfalls  which  thunder  into  the  pic- 
ture at  one  corner  and  impetuously  rush  out  of 
the  opposite  appeal  to  few.  The  sketching 
grounds  for  the  landscape  painter,  here  and  else- 
where, have  never  been  brought  to  his  attention 
by  the  traveling  public.  His  instinct  for  unadul- 
terated nature,  character,  simplicity,  and  true 
picturesqueness  has  led  him  there.  St.  Ives, 
Concarneau,  Etaples,  Laren,  Volendam,  Worps- 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW    41 

wede,  Dachau — to  name  a  few  abroad — would 
not  be  on  the  map  if  it  were  not  for  the  artist. 
They  become  known  in  spite  of  the  lack  of  public 
patronage.  Here  in  America  it  has  been  the 
same.  The  virile  character  of  the  Maine  coast, 
expressed  so  simply  by  Homer — Woodstock,  to 
whose  beauties  the  eyes  of  the  public  have  been 
opened  by  Birge  Harrison,  John  F.  Carlson,  and 
their  disciples — such  nooks  and  corners  are  not 
nourished  by  the  automobile  arteries  of  the 
affluent  traveler.  In  the  west  the  discerning 
artist  turns  away  from  the  Canadian  Rockies, 
the  great  mountains  of  the  Northwest,  Yosem- 
ite,  Lake  Tahoe,  and  other  co-called  beauty 
spots,  to  retire  to  the  placid  beauty  of  Monterey 
Bay,  Laguna  Beach,  Bolinas  Bay,  the  shore  of 
Marin  county,  or  the  marshes  of  Alameda.  The 
desert  appeals  to  many  strongly,  no  matter  how 
disagreeable  are  the  associations  psychologically 
connected  with  it.  How  many  really  excellent 
pictures  are  there  at  the  art  exhibits  based  on 
subjects  which  are  commonly  spoken  of  as 
"scenic  wonders"?  Very  few  that  I  can  remem- 
ber. On  the  other  hand,  some  of  the  most  capti- 
vating of  canvases  are  based  on  subjects  which 
no  layman  would  stop  to  look  at  if  he  saw  them 


42    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

in  reality.  A  most  convincing  example  of  this 
sort  is  the  small  Le  Sidaner  canvas  belonging  to 
the  Luxembourg,  that  has  been  exhibited  in 
many  places  in  the  United  States — an  aban- 
doned supper-table,  in  a  backyard  of  a  French 
manor.  A  lamp  is  burning  on  the  table,  and  the 
whole  picture  is  bathed  in  the  atmosphere  of  a 
warm  summer  evening.  The  picture  was  ac- 
claimed a  gem  by  the  artists  first,  and  later  by 
the  public — by  the  artists  because  they  realized 
the  daring  and  originality  of  the  author  in  mak- 
ing so  big  an  appeal  with  a  relatively  insignifi- 
cant motive,  and  by  the  public,  eventually, 
yielding  at  last  to  the  convincing  poetic  atmos- 
phere of  a  picture  full  of  intimate  charm.  Aside 
from  that,  it  has  other  technical  qualities  and 
charms  of  color,  typical  of  Le  Sidaner,  of  which 
I  want  to  speak  later. 

In  the  other  fields  of  painting  it  is  much  the 
same.  In  figure  painting  the  richly  and  expen- 
sively gowned  woman  often  appears  trivial  and 
uninteresting  as  compared  with  Duveneck's 
ragged  Whistling  Boy  in  the  Cincinnati  Mu- 
seum, who  looks  much  more  picturesque  than  a 
polished  and  primped  society  portrait.  Artists 
have  a  way  of  turning  toward  the  dilapidated, 


ARTIST'S  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW    43 

the  ruined,  the  decayed,  and  it  is  no  morbidness, 
either,  which  deflects  their  attention  to  those 
things.  There  is  variety  of  form,  of  surface,  of 
color,  in  old  weathered  buildings,  covered  with 
watermarks  and  many  discolorations  lacking  to 
a  brand  new  house,  as  in  Robert  Spencer's  Phila- 
delphia Tenements. 

We  even  find  the  artist  engaged  in  painting 
things  which  are  repulsive  to  us  on  physical  con- 
tact. Slimy  pools,  emitting  stenches  and  breed- 
ing mosquitos,  not  infrequently  make  charming 
subjects  for  canvases,  and  neglected  cemeteries 
appeal  to  the  artist  a  good  deal  more  than  to  the 
layman.  This  realism,  if  we  call  it  this,  is  not 
a  product  of  the  modern  age,  either,  and  it  cer- 
tainly has  brought  into  existence  multitudes  of 
very  enticing  works  of  art.  Velasquez's  beggars, 
reeking  with  filth  and  dilapidation,  Franz  Hals's 
fishwomen,  and  a  great  number  of  modern  things 
are  of  that  class,  Randall  Davey's  Drinker,  for 
example. 

By  contrast,  one  is  led  into  the  examination 
of  the  so-called  idealized  expression  of  a  sub- 
ject in  a  painting.  Our  innate  sense  of  beauty 
often  moves  us  to  idealize  whatever  we  wish  to 
endow  with  increased  artistic  appeal.    Idealiza- 


44    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

tion  is  the  method  most  frequently  practiced  of 
giving  a  picture  interest  and  charm.  Goethe  has 
described  it  as  a  concentration  upon  the  most 
important,  the  most  appealing  elements  in  a 
subject. 

To  single  out,  for  instance,  the  height  of  a  per- 
son as  a  desirable  artistic  feature,  we  find  that 
in  practically  all  great  paintings  of  import- 
ant personages  the  height  has  been  made  much 
more  than  the  original  warrants.  Such  tenuous, 
stately  ladies  as  Gainsborough,  Reynolds,  Rom- 
ney,  and  Hoppner  painted  never  walked  this 
earth,  but  we  seem  quite  willing  to  believe  in 
them.  The  laughable  efforts  of  society  photo- 
graphers, putting  their  stumpy  patrons  on  pedes- 
tals, carefully  disguised  by  flowing  trains — 
those  touching  absurdities  will  not  leave  my 
memory.  It  discloses  photography  in  one  of  its 
most  distressing  handicaps.  This  enlargement 
upon  desirable  qualities,  proportion,  color,  etc., 
we  find  practised  in  all  forms  of  painting,  and 
we  might  say  that  no  picture  ever  was  entirely 
free  from  it.  Whistler's  witty  retort  to  a  lady 
who  contended  she  had  never  seen  in  the  skies 
sunsets  of  such  superb  gorgeousness  as  Turner 
painted  is  very  characteristic  of  the  true  artist. 


THE  DRINKER 


I'LATK  \  II 


From  tlie  Oil  Paimin  .  bj 

Rami  \i  i.  1)  \\  BY 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW    45 

He  answered  the  naive  complaint  by  the  whim- 
sical question,  "But  don't  you  wish  you  could?" 

In  general,  the  artist  recognizes  two  distinct 
types  of  pictures,  the  naturalistic  picture  and 
the  decorative;  if  the  public  also  understood  the 
distinction,  much  would,  I  think,  be  gained.  The 
first  and  the  older  one  of  the  two  is  the  natural- 
istic picture,  as  it  is  called — that  picture  which 
tries  to  create  an  illusion  which  will  make  you 
forget  there  is  such  a  thing  as  canvas  and  wall. 
Pictures  of  this  type  may  deal  with  any  subject. 
They  are  regarded  by  many  as  a  bastard  race,  a 
perversion  of  the  real  function  of  painting.  The 
type  came  about  gradually,  fostered  by  false 
outlook  and  false  ideals.  Its  most  popular 
achievements  were  the  still-lifes  and  interiors  of 
the  Seventeenth  Century  Dutch,  and  later  on 
the  Munich  and  Diisseldorf  school.  The  latter 
kind  could  in  most  cases  be  much  more  sympa- 
thetically rendered  by  literary  means,  and  to 
the  layman  became  much  more  enjoyable  in  the 
works  of  such  men  as  Dickens  than  in  painting. 

We  must  not  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  paint- 
ing is  after  all  the  art  of  ennobling  and  decorat- 
ing a  surface  by  means  of  form,  area,  color — and 
an  idea,  of  course;  but  the  idea  must  not  be  in 


V  - 


46    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

sole  control  of  the  problem,  to  the  detriment  of 
the  mere  qualities  of  design.  Themes  like  Hov- 
enden's  "Breaking  Home  Ties,"  in  all  its  senti- 
mentality, would  be  much  more  appealing  in 
literature.  It  is  too  "literatesque"  a  subject  to 
be  justified  in  painting.  If  you  were  to  turn  the 
painting  upside  down — let  me  say  this  to  ex- 
plain more  radically  what  I  want  to  say — it 
would  become  uninteresting  in  the  extreme.  If 
you  treat  a  canvas  by  Abbey  or  Alexander  in  the 
same  way  it  would  still  exert  a  charm,  because 
of  a  certain  arrangement  of  spaces  and  by  reason 
of  the  relation  of  these  spaces,  its  coloring,  and 
its  design  generally,  which  give  it  interest  no 
matter  from  what  distance  it  is  viewed  nor  from 
what  view-point.  If,  irrespective  of  the  signifi- 
cance of  the  subject,  this  experiment  is  tried 
once  or  twice,  it  will  convince  many  people  of  its 
reasonableness. 

In  modern  times  the  naturalistic  picture  of  the 
older  schools  has  had  to  yield  to  the  convention- 
alized expression  of  form  and  color  we  meet  in 
the  decorative  picture.  The  aims  of  these  two 
types  of  picture  are  almost  opposite,  and  so  con- 
stantly confused  that  a  lack  of  appreciation  of 
the  principles  involved  in  either  one  leads  to 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLIC'S  POINT  OF  VIEW    47 

more  misunderstandings  than  almost  any  other 
fundamental  artistic  contention.  The  decorative 
picture,  in  which  I  group  most  conventionalized 
art  expression,  has  come  to  us  from  the  Orient. 
The  Japanese  screen  picture,  with  its  formal 
linear  treatment,  its  elimination  of  shadows  and 
lights,  has  caused  a  tendency  in  modern  art 
which  meets  with  much  hostility  on  the  part  of 
the  western  public.  The  naturalistic  picture,  as 
I  remarked  before,  aims  at  a  complete  illusion. 
In  trying  to  destroy  the  surface  on  which  it  is 
painted,  it  creates,  so  to  speak,  a  hole  in  the 
wall.  The  person  looking  at  such  a  picture  is  led 
far  into  the  picture.  The  element  of  aerial  per- 
spective which  involves  the  change  of  appear- 
ance objects  assume  by  loss  of  color  as  they  are 
removed  farther  from  the  eye  is  an  important 
element  in  such  pictures.  The  decorative  picture 
is  built  up  on  entirely  different  principles.  My 
own  contention  is  that  the  purely  naturalistic 
picture  in  a  certain  sense  is  really  not  good  art 
at  all,  since  the  art  of  painting  aims  primarily  at 
the  decorating  of  surfaces,  with  a  proper  regard 
for  the  preservation  of  such  surfaces  in  the  archi- 
tectural ensemble.  However,  the  naturalistic 
imitative  picture  has  come  to  stay,  though  a 


48    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

great  many  pictures  of  that  type  on  investiga- 
tion are  found  to  belong  to  the  decorative  con- 
ventionalized group.  The  decorative  picture  is 
the  picture  of  the  present  day.  Our  exhibitions 
are  controlled  by  them,  and  the  public  is  grow- 
ing to  appreciate  them  more  and  more.  Pictures 
like  "Monterey  Cypresses"  by  Mathews,  at  the 
Metropolitan  Museum,  the  "Monterey  Bay"  by 
Bruce  Nelson,  and  particularly  Joseph  T.  Pear- 
son's "In  the  Valley,"  in  fact  the  canvases  of  all 
our  leading  men  are  largely  decorative,  conven- 
tional, rather  than  naturalistic,  imitative.  An 
example  of  the  other  type,  the  naturalistic  or 
imitative,  is  Church's  well  known  "Niagara," 
which  aims  at  absolute  fidelity  to  nature  with- 
out, however,  giving  it.  The  great  painters  of  all 
times  have  always  been  strongly  imbued  with 
the  principle  of  dealing  arbitrarily  with  natural- 
istic facts  and  still  carrying  the  interesting  mes- 
sage of  indoors  or  out-of-doors. 

While  there  is  an  astonishing  variety  of  artis- 
tic expression,  the  laws  on  which  production  is 
based  are  in  most  cases  the  same,  used  either  in- 
stinctively or  with  full  knowledge.  They  are  the 
rules  which  the  painter  is  taught  in  the  schools, 
or  at  least  ought  to  have  been  taught,  and  which 


THE  BROKEN   OAK. 


PLATE  VIII 


From  the  Water  Color  Painting  by 

I'i:  \m  i-  \I<  Comas 

Owned  by 

Mrs.  C.  B.  Raymond,  Santa  Barbara,  Cal 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLIC'S  POINT  OF  VIEW    49 

should  become  a  part  of  his  artistic  instinct  while 
at  work.  They  are  the  laws  we  know  as  the  laws 
of  composition,  the  art  of  putting  things  to- 
gether for  an  agreeable  artistic  effect.  The  word 
"design"  covers  the  process  more  completely, 
since  it  includes  color,  and  it  is  the  importance  of 
these  laws  of  design,  as  applied  to  the  making  of 
pictures,  which  I  should  like  to  impress  upon  the 
public.  A  successful  application  of  them  will  in- 
variably culminate  in  certain  artistic  qualities 
we  have  since  time  immemorial  recognized  as 
desirable.  They  are  Balance,  Harmony  and 
Rhythm,  and  Color.  The  most  important  thing 
to  convince  the  public  of  is  the  fact  of  the  arbi- 
trary attitude  of  the  trained  painter  toward  his 
subject.  Whether  it  be  a  portrait,  landscape, 
interior,  still-life,  or  what  not,  the  thinking 
painter  will  always  arrange  the  subject  for  his 
canvas  to  suit  himself  or  he  will  arrange  the  ob- 
ject in  a  way  as  nearly  approaching  what  he  calls 
a  good  composition.  Only  the  rank  amateur,  the 
person  of  no  experience,  or  too  stupid  to  under- 
stand, will  attack  any  subject  as  it  presents 
itself.  It  is  this  that  decides  upon  the  success  or 
failure  of  a  painting.  Our  great  figure  painters — 
Whistler,  Sargent,   Chase,  Tarbell,  or  any  of 


50    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

those  whose  work  seems  so  obviously  correct  and 
complete — show  obedience  to  these  laws  with- 
out any  evident  effort.  Outdoor  subjects  are 
even  more  affected,  and  the  study  of  any  land- 
scape, cloud  arrangement,  foliage,  shows,  in  spite 
of  its  effect  upon  the  observer  of  truthfulness, 
that  although  these  paintings  may  bear  the 
name  of  a  locality,  they  are  never  accurate 
copies  of  the  spot.  There  are  landscapes  which 
are  attempted  copies  of  nature,  but  they  are 
painful  to  the  eye,  they  are  devoid  of  everything 
that  makes  a  work  of  art  interesting.  The  earli- 
est attempts  of  the  painters  of  the  Hudson  River 
School  are  pathetic  evidences  of  the  futility  of 
copying  nature.  Nothing  will  enrage  the  artist 
half  so  much  as  the  well-meant,  naive  question 
of  the  interested  layman,  "Where  did  you  take 
this  picture?"  It  was  probably,  if  at  all  a  good 
picture,  not  "taken"  anywhere,  probably  not 
even  painted  outdoors,  but  largely  the  accumu- 
lated result  of  the  artist's  studies  outdoors.  Be- 
sides, hardly  any  painting,  no  matter  of  what 
subject,  is  true  to  nature.  The  very  best  we 
should  expect  of  it  is  an  agreeable  approxima- 
tion. It  is  always  a  sad  day  for  any  enthusiast 
when  he  finds  out  there  is  no  such  thing  as  imi- 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW   51 

tation  of  nature  in  art.  Already  Reynolds,  in  his 
most  interesting  discourses  on  art,  points  out 
to  his  students  that  general  copying  is  a  delusive 
kind  of  industry.  "The  student  satisfies  himself 
with  the  appearance  of  doing  something;  he  falls 
into  the  dangerous  habit  of  imitating  without 
selecting,  and  of  laboring  without  any  determi- 
nate object.  As  it  requires  no  effort  of  the  mind, 
he  sleeps  over  his  work;  and  those  powers  of  in- 
vention and  disposition  which  ought  particu- 
larly to  be  called  out  and  put  into  action  lie  tor- 
pid and  lose  their  energy  for  want  of  exercise. 
How  incapable  of  producing  anything  of  their 
own  are  those  who  have  spent  their  time  in  mak- 
ing finished  copies,  is  an  observation  well  known 
to  all  who  are  conversant  with  art." 

And  why  should  anybody  want  to  copy  na- 
ture? The  many  attempts  I  have  seen  were  all 
of  the  most  unsatisfactory  kind.  First  of  all, 
nature  is  not  always  beautiful,  and  when  she  is, 
it  is  never  with  the  fulness  of  beauty  that  a  true 
artist  can  give  her  in  his  work.  Moreover,  why 
duplicate  something  that  already  exists  unless 
you  can  glorify  it,  visioning  its  most  exalted  pos- 
sibilities? 

Most  pictures  of  the  great  masters  of  out-of- 


52    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

doors  look  most  decidedly  as  if  they  had  been 
done  in  the  open  though  they  rarely  were.  Wins- 
low  Homer's  early  paintings  of  ladies  in  ham- 
mocks and  boys  eating  watermelons  are  very 
close  to  the  "taken"  picture,  though  a  feeling 
for  design  was  never  lacking  in  his  work.  Not  a 
single  Corot,  not  one  of  his  many  "Ville  d'Av- 
rays,"  ever  did  exist,  nor  did  any  of  our  Ameri- 
can Barbizon  followers,  such  as  Inness  or  Keith, 
ever  paint  actual  places  in  their  riper  works. 
Keith's  many  "Sonoma  Valleys"  or  "Berkeley 
Oaks"  are  general  types  rather  than  facts. 

It  is  this  arbitrary  arrangement  of  compo- 
nent parts  of  any  picture  upon  the  canvas  which 
puzzles  the  public  and  which  the  artist  recog- 
nizes as  the  first  important  evidence  of  his  fellow 
artist's  ability.  Munkaczy,  the  great  Hungarian 
painter,  painted  even  his  very  largest  pictures, 
like  "Golgotha,"  so  to  speak,  out  of  his  sleeve. 
His  preliminary  studies,  his  sketches,  were  not 
within  his  reach  during  his  final  work,  and  the 
popular  fallacy  that  a  large  picture  is  merely  an 
enlargement  of  a  small  sketch  is  easily  disproved 
by  the  fact.  Our  own  William  Keith,  to  return 
once  more  to  him,  was  a  most  interesting  ex- 
ample of  the  ability  to  work  independently  and 


ARTISTS  VS.  PUBLICS  POINT  OF  VIEW   S3 

creatively  without  the  presence  of  sketches  or 
studies. 

Every  painter  has  suffered  untold  agonies  in 
his  contact  with  the  public  when  sketching  out- 
doors, particularly  when  the  unsophisticated 
question  is  asked  before  his  finished  study,  into 
which  everything  has  been  carried  that  is  essen- 
tial, "Of  course  when  you  get  home  you  will 
finish  this?"  Generally  and  good-naturedly  that 
expectation  is  granted  by  the  tormented  painter, 
who  is  ready  more  or  less  to  grant  anything 
under  the  condition.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  what 
the  artist  takes  out  of  nature  is  only  a  limited 
number  of  things,  and  these  are  the  essential 
things,  things  which  carry  the  point.  He  knows 
that  if  he  should  take  everything  there  is,  his 
picture  would  be  nothing  but  nature  rendered  on 
a  small  scale,  while  the  thing  he  is  really  after  is 
to  maintain  that  feeling  of  the  big  scale  that  is 
so  uplifting  in  nature.  Any  layman  who  ever 
watched  a  painter  work  is  amazed  as  he  sees  how 
many  things  that  he  puts  on  his  canvas  the  lay- 
man's untrained  eye  has  not  observed  in  nature 
itself.  So  the  first  thing  the  man  on  the  outside 
should  understand  is  the  artist's  necessity  for 
making  whatever  arbitrary  changes  he  sees  fit  in 


54    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

order  to  attain  Balance,  Harmony  and  Rhythm, 
and  in  the  end  that  feeling  of  unity,  of  oneness, 
which  is  so  essential  in  any  great  work  of  art. 
What  charms  us  in  a  picture  is  the  artist's  ability 
to  seize  upon  a  single  phase  of  something  he  has 
observed  and  to  present  it  to  us  in  its  most  con- 
vincing, most  characteristic,  and  most  beautiful 
aspect.     The  entire  range  of  human  qualities 
may  be  reflected  in  figural  and  portrait  work, 
while  all  the  subtler  shades  of  outdoor  moods 
may  enter  into  the  appeal  of  a  landscape.    It 
must  become  clear,  then,  that  the  obviousness 
of  a  picture  as  an  accurate  representation  of  a 
fact  is  not   an   exhaustive   test  of  its   artistic 
worth,  and  the  artist  can  hardly  be  expected  to 
be  very  cheerful  when  he  finds  that  most  people 
are  never  going  beyond  that  point.    However, 
the  qualities  which  the  artist  recognizes  and 
which  give  joy  to  his  art  are  so  demonstrable 
that  it  will  not  be  a  lost  labor  to  deal  with  them 
more  specifically.  A  picture,  to  whatever  type  it 
belongs,  portrait,  figure,  landscape,  or  genre,  is 
a  complete  unit,  all  by  itself.    Its  relation  to  the 
wall  upon  which  it  hangs  forces  restrictions  upon 
it  of  which  we  are  not  conscious  in  nature.    A 
picture  is  an  arrangement,  and  that  assumption 


ARTIST'S  FS.  PUBLIC'S  POINT  OF  VIEW      55 

at  once  gives  it  freedom  of  expression.  If  it  were 
merely  a  slavish  imitation,  it  would  be  lacking 
in  all  the  vital  appeal  which  comes  with  the  in- 
telligent manifestations  of  rules.  I  see  no  neces- 
sity for  entering  upon  any  discussion,  even  cas- 
ually, of  the  meaning  of  the  many  subjects 
found  in  pictorial  art.  I  believe  that  they  pre- 
sent no  such  problems  as  the  appreciation  of  the 
purely  abstract  qualities  of  art  in  a  picture. 
Anybody  will  easily  be  able  to  learn  to  recognize 
what  a  picture  means  in  an  intellectual  way,  al- 
though I  should  like  to  qualify  this  statement 
by  excluding  certain  modern  pictures  which  are 
often  enigmatic  in  their  meaning. 


j6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


ON  COMPOSITION 

A  PICTURE  undergoes  manifold  construc- 
tive operations  in  its  development  from  frag- 
mentary sketches  to  the  definite  product.  The 
putting  together  of  the  various  elements  which 
constitute  a  picture  offers,  naturally,  boundless 
opportunities  for  individual  expression.  To  the 
artist,  therefore,  it  is  a  most  engrossing  process. 
He  begins  with  limitless  possibilities  for  self-ex- 
pression. How  to  divide  the  surface  of  the  can- 
vas on  which  he  works  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
give  an  unusual  amount  of  aesthetic  pleasure 
and  preserve,  at  the  same  time,  the  meaning  of 
the  subject — here  is  a  problem  which,  unques- 
tionably, offers  the  one  opportunity  by  which 
the  painter  may  always  hope  to  attain  a  new 
note.  Composition  has  nevertheless  a  much 
larger  meaning  than  most  terms  emanating  from 
the  studio.  Of  course  I  realize  fully  that  here 
again  many  will  interject  the  thought  that  as 
long  as  the  artist  reproduces  a  thing  as  he  sees  it, 
as  it  is  before  him,  he  need  not  enlarge  upon  his 
many  difficulties  and  change  things  around  to 


ON  COMPOSITION  57 

satisfy  his  perverse  whims  of  fact-juggling.  It  is 
generally  a  commendable  attitude  to  have  such 
implicit  faith  in  nature,  but  her  compositions 
are  not  always  arranged  to  suit  the  demands  of 
an  artist.  Nature  as  she  exists  is  a  big  unending 
unity  of  many  things  interrelated,  and  on  a 
little  thought  must  appear  quite  different  from 
a  small  fragment  of  her  confined  in  a  picture 
frame  of  rectangular  proportions.  Nature  has 
no  frame.  She  is  indefinite.  Her  effects  melt  into 
one  another  in  evanescent  fashion.  The  thing 
seen  outdoors  is  altogether  different  from  what 
the  painter  must  present  within  the  physical 
boundaries  of  a  frame.  It  is  sadly  true  that  few 
artists  pay  much  attention  to  the  frame,  as  such, 
though  one  is  at  times  highly  gratified  by  indi- 
vidual effects,  as,  for  instance,  the  fine  propor- 
tion and  colour  in  the  frames  of  Herman  Dudley 
Murphy.  Nevertheless,  there  exists  the  line,  the 
boundary  of  a  picture,  accentuated  by  the  frame 
which  has  given  the  raison  d'etre  for  many  com- 
position laws. 

What  has  so  definitely  settled  the  shape  of  our 
frames  is  probably  an  attempt  to  standardize  all 
compositional  laws  upon  the  one  shape.  When 
one  contemplates  the  many  shapes  of  frames 


S8    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

possible  on  the  basis  of  geometrical  potentialities, 
one  cannot  but  wonder  at  the  very  restricted 
shapes  in  vogue.  Is  it,  perhaps,  that  we  feel  a 
lack  of  stability  in  differently  shaped  frames, 
oval,  for  instance,  or  round? 

Our  compositional  laws  are  all,  naturally, 
guided  and  shaped  by  the  system  of  construc- 
tion of  the  human  body.  First  of  all,  our  picture 
must  have  feet,  something  to  stand  on,  a  base. 
The  horizontal  lower  side  of  the  picture  furnishes 
this  basis.  In  the  round  frame  we  do  not  get  the 
satisfaction  of  organic  stability  from  the  bot- 
tom up,  so  to  speak.  The  round  or  oval  frame  is 
sideless.  It  is  absolutely  without  beginning  or 
end.  The  treatment  pictorially  of  that  part  of 
the  picture  which  borders  upon  the  lower  hori- 
zontal line  is  often  secondary,  frequently  a  mere 
nothingness  of  tone  and  meaningless  form.  As 
we  travel  upward  in  a  picture  we  have  a  gradual 
development  of  energies,  a  loosening  of  form,  a 
certain  attempt  at  gesticulation,  which  we  may 
liken  to  that  of  the  human  body.  The  seat  of 
expression  with  a  human  is  decidedly  above  the 
belt.  The  lower  part  of  our  body  furnishes  the 
foundation,  the  support  for  the  activities  and 
movements  of  expression  which  emanate  from 


ON  COMPOSITION  59 

the  upper  part.  It  is  quite  the  same  with  pic- 
tures, at  least  with  good  ones.  When  the  picture 
is  divided  into  halves  by  a  vertical  line,  it  will 
often  reveal  equal  opposing  forces;  horizontally 
divided,  no  such  condition  exists.  Again,  the 
picture  may  be  likened  to  a  plant,  a  tree,  in  its 
upward  growth  from  basal  stability  as  exem- 
plified by  the  roots,  and  the  increased  flexibility 
and  life  of  the  upper  lateral  limits  and  minor 
branches.  While  we  are  vertically  symmetrical, 
horizontally  divided  in  half  we  are  not.  In  the 
picture  we  often  find,  similarly,  the  expressive 
movements  and  forms  of  composition  above  the 
immobile  and  stationary  region  of  the  fore- 
ground. 

Our  examination  of  a  picture  generally  begins 
with  the  bottom.  We  slide  into  the  picture  from 
below,  seldom  from  either  side  or  from  the  top. 
There  may  be  exceptions  to  this  rule,  but  cer- 
tainly not  among  painters  who  do  not  lay  out 
their  pictures  for  the  sake  of  being  analyzed  in 
some  other  way  than  the  conventional.  The 
general  scheme  of  distribution  of  force  in  most 
compositions  may  be  described  as  a  horizontal 
line  supporting  a  vertical  line.  This  is  often  the 
disposition  in  pictures  of  greater  height  than 


60    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

width  and  those  which  are  square.  The  horizon- 
tally inclined  canvas  will  naturally  have  very 
little  of  this  building  up.  The  shape  of  pictures 
is  of  the  utmost  importance,  and  not  merely 
an  accident,  as  many  think.  Most  conscientious 
artists  have  a  stack  of  many  canvases  of  many 
proportions  from  which  they  select  with  great 
discrimination.  They  realize  fully  that  the  rela- 
tion of  a  subject  in  a  picture  to  the  four  sides  of 
the  canvas  is  the  first  and  most  important  con- 
sideration. How  important  this  is  and  how  diffi- 
cult it  is  to  gage  absolutely  the  effect  might  be 
demonstrated  in  the  beginning  by  the  fact  that 
some  of  our  most  able  artists  feel  the  necessity 
for  altering  the  shape  of  their  pictures  after  hav- 
ing proceeded  with  them  pretty  far.  How  many 
pictures  have  been  cut  down  after  they  were  fin- 
ished to  adjust  their  composition  we  do  not 
know.  Only  an  examination  of  the  hidden  edge 
of  the  canvas  would  disclose  that,  but  that  some 
had  pieces  added  to  them  afterward  some  of  the 
work  of  our  most  competent  painters  discloses. 
John  Johansen's  splendid  "Rider"  had  at  some 
time  during  its  production  almost  half  a  foot 
added  to  the  base  and  a  smaller  amount  at  the 
right.  A  casual  examination  of  the  picture  shows 


ON  COMPOSITION  61 

the  seam  where  the  joining  was  made.  Some 
will  argue  that  it  might  have  been  better  techni- 
cally to  paint  the  whole  thing  over  again  but  a 
painter  generally  knows  what  he  has  already 
accomplished,  and  to  do  a  thing  over  is  not 
wholly  within  the  power  of  the  will.  That  ad- 
mirable canvas  was  unquestionably  much  im- 
proved by  the  addition  of  the  two  strips.  It  is 
more  satisfactory  now  to  be  able  to  see  clear 
under  the  horse,  rather  than  to  have  the  unsatis- 
factory suggestion  of  the  enormous  bulk  of  the 
animal  run  against  the  lower  side  of  the  frame. 
The  little  strip  at  the  right  gives  more  freedom 
to  the  head  of  the  horse  and  also  takes  the  girl 
to  the  left,  a  little  out  of  the  exact  physical  cen- 
ter of  the  picture.  Gari  Melcher's  large  canvas 
"Maternity"  acquired  an  addition  to  its  base  to 
satisfy  a  compositional  demand,  and  another  by 
him,  "The  Smithy,"  bears  evidence  of  the  alter- 
ing of  its  shape.  The  size  of  a  picture  assumes  in 
pictorial  art  a  much  greater  importance  than 
most  people  realize.  Obviously  it  would  be  much 
less  troublesome  to  the  artist  to  have  certain 
definite  sizes  used,  agreed  upon  by  everybody, 
but  the  requirements  of  different  subjects  vary 
so  much  that  any  such  uniformity  is  manifestly 


62    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

impossible.  As  it  is  with  the  size,  so  it  is  with 
the  proportions.  Many  a  perfectly  good  motive 
has  been  destroyed  by  adjusting  it  into  a  badly 
proportioned  frame.  Certain  pictures  demand  a 
vertical  emphasis — others  a  horizontal.  The  ver- 
tical grandeur  of  a  waterfall,  of  a  group  of 
stately  trees,  is  often  enhanced  in  dignity  by 
emphasizing  the  natural  expression  of  vertical- 
ly. On  the  other  hand,  how  stunted  do  arrange- 
ments of  that  sort  look  if  put  into  a  square 
frame,  which  nullifies  all  vertical  growth  in  the 
picture.  Contrasted  with  this  vertical  develop- 
ment we  find  the  horizontal  composition  so 
common  in  marines  or  paintings  of  marshes, 
where  a  certain  horizontal  indefiniteness  is  ap- 
propriate to  the  characterization  of  the  subject. 
Most  marines  do  look  more  convincing  in  a  hori- 
zontal arrangement,  unless  an  expansive  sky 
above  the  water  is  moreimportant  than  the  ocean 
itself,  as  it  often  is  in  Emil  Carlsen's  work. 
Ritschel's  marines,  again,  are  often  directly 
opposite  in  composition  to  Carlsen's,  displaying 
hardly  any  sky,  but  a  boldly  patterned  water 
surface  which  by  reason  of  its  detached  interest 
is  well  confined  in  an  almost  square  canvas.  It 
is  one  of  the  most  fascinating  of  pleasures  to 


ON  COMPOSITION  63 

study  the  compositional  growth  of  a  picture 
from  its  sketchy  foundation  to  the  finished  pro- 
duct. Hardly  any  canvas  ever  remained  the  same 
through  its  evolutionary  stages.  To  find  a  good 
composition  outright  and  bodily  lift  it  upon  a 
canvas  is  scarcely  possible,  although  we  speak 
of  paintable  subjects  and  those  which  are  not. 
By  picturesqueness,  we  do  not  invariably  mean 
color  and  an  interesting  occurrence,  but  often 
compositional  opportunities.  Holland  has  for 
many  years  been  the  sketching  ground  for  many 
painters  on  account  of  the  simple  arrangement 
of  her  out-of-doors,  a  quality  so  very  useful  in 
the  making  of  pictures.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
complex  contortions  of  a  tropical  Amazon  land- 
scape will  hold  charms  only  to  a  deluded  painter. 
Simplicity  is  the  one  desirable  feature  which  the 
painter  knows  he  cannot  sacrifice,  no  matter 
how  spectacular  the  thing  may  be  to  the  eye. 
Simple  contrasts  of  light  and  dark  are  often  met 
with  in  pictorial  composition,  and  the  silhouette 
plays  a  very  important  part  in  much  of  our  mod- 
ern decorative  art.  It  seems  to  me  the  art  of  the 
present  day  pays  a  good  deal  more  attention  to 
composition  than  that  of  any  previous  period, 
which  may  be  explained  by  the  importance  the 


64    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

decorative  picture  has  attained.  The  pure  joy 
of  abstract  beauty  of  line  and  form  and  color 
seem  to  appeal  to  the  artist  more  than  ever — 
though  less  to  the  layman,  who  does  not  know 
what  to  do  with  therm,  whether  on  account  of  a 
lack  of  training  in  such  matters  or  of  inherent 
artistic  perception. 

Much  could  be  done  to  help  the  cause  of  art 
and  the  public  at  the  same  time  through  study  of 
the  principles  of  composition,  or  of  the  desirable 
conditions  in  a  work  of  art,  and  the  way  they 
are  attained.  A  good  deal  has  been  written  on 
the  subject  of  composition,  and  some  of  the 
books  are  exhaustive  in  showing  endless  pos- 
sibilities rather  than  in  demonstrating  artistic 
reasons.  The  primary  importance  of  the  sub- 
ject becomes  manifest  when  one  considers  that 
no  attention  can  be  paid  by  the  artist  to  mere 
painting  until  the  location  of  each  form  within  the 
picture  is  definitely  established.  The  partly  fin- 
nished  works  of  many  artists  have  shown  us  the 
many  experimental  changes  which  pictures  suffer 
in  their  development  toward  the  final  form,  and 
it  is  this  which  gives  to  many  sketches  and  stu- 
dies a  charm  of  which  the  finished  picture,  often 
turned  cold  and  inanimate,  is  devoid. 


A   MEMENTO   OF  OLD   MADRID 


PI. ATI    l\ 


From  t he  Oil  Painting  by 

HOVSE  I'   PUSHMAN 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  65 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES 

WHEN  the  varied  elements  of  a  picture  are 
arranged  in  such  a  way  as  to  result  in  a  condi- 
tion of  repose,  we  may  well  regard  it  as  prop- 
erly balanced.  Obviously  the  constituents  of  a 
picture  which  engage  our  attention  may  com- 
prise a  great  variety  of  elements,  disposed  of  in 
an  even  larger  variety  of  ways.  In  order  to  sim- 
plify matters,  I  will  attempt  to  classify  the  vari- 
ous elements,  so  as  to  be  able  to  deal  with  them 
separately.  In  thinking  of  balance,  the  various 
kinds  of  scales  may  readily  come  to  our  mind, 
and  to  help  illustrate  and  understand  the  prob- 
lem, they  serve  the  purpose  well. 

We  cannot,  of  course,  speak  of  physical  bal- 
ance in  a  work  of  art  in  two  dimensions  as  we  do 
in  sculpture  or  architecture,  though  the  under- 
lying idea  is  the  same  in  all.  A  comparison  with 
a  pair  of  scales  will  be  found  convincing  in  more 
than  one  way,  particularly  in  the  fact  that  the 
point  of  support  is  found  in  the  center  of  both 
the  picture  and  the  instrument.  That  is  to  say, 
an  ordinary  scale,  consisting  of  two  arms  of 


66    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

equal  length,  supporting  equal  weights,  will  find 
its  counterpart  in  many  pictures  of  similar  ar- 
rangement, such  arrangement  resulting  in  obvi- 
ously absolute  symmetry,  On  the  other  hand, 
another  kind  of  scale,  with  the  supporting  point 
slightly  removed  from  the  center,  and  two  arms 
of  different  lengths,  comes  much  closer  to  a  more 
usual  system  of  balancing  the  various  units  of  a 
painting.  The  opposition  of  objects  dissimilar 
in  appearance  but  of  equal  force  of  attraction 
appears  to  be  the  aim  of  many  artists  striving  for 
originality  and  variety.  Anything  that  conveys 
to  the  eyes  the  impression  of  a  greater  weight  will 
naturally  attract  our  eye  more  forcibly  than  an 
object  of  lesser  interest.  Granting  for  the  pres- 
ent that  this  contention  is  correct,  it  will  be 
found  subject  to  a  great  many  interesting  moid- 
flcations  and  variations.  Line,  form,  color,  light, 
and  dark  may  all  be  set  to  play  against  each 
other,  in  order  to  distribute  the  interest  equally 
within  the  frame,  the  natural  boundary  of  the 
picture.  Next  to  the  purely  abstract  agencies, 
the  powers  or  sentimental  or  even  merely  intel- 
lectual appeal  will  have  to  be  considered;  every 
conceivable  kind  of  object  in  a  picture  which 
exerts  an  attraction  must  be  taken  into  account. 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  67 

The  social  rank,  physiognomy,  size,  and  action 
of  a  person  may  all  call  for  proper  adjustment 
of  a  pictorial  composition,  in  order  to  insure  bal- 
ance. Distribution  of  similar  objects  in  even  or 
uneven  numbers  often  seriously  engages  a  pain- 
ter before  he  ever  thinks  of  their  detailed  ex- 
pression. 

The  easiest  way  of  creating  balance  in  a  pic- 
ture, as  already  pointed  out,  is,  of  course,  to 
make  it  perfectly  symmetrical.  But  it  will  read- 
ily be  seen  that  balance  of  that  kind  is  apt  to  be 
uninteresting  in  the  extreme,  and  therefore 
hardly  ever  artistic.  Recognizing  this  necessity 
for  variety,  the  painter's  ingenuity,  in  order  to 
meet  the  requirements  of  artistic  quality,  is  put 
to  a  singularly  hard  task.  Beginning  with  the 
simplest  graphic  expression,  the  line,  the  artist 
through  observation  knows  that  shapes  bounded 
by  perfectly  straight  lines  will  very  easily  be 
outweighed  in  interest  by  those  held  together  by 
a  curved  line,  for  the  very  simple  reason  that 
straight  lines  in  their  lack  of  character,  their 
meaningless  form,  do  not  excite  our  interest  as 
does  a  curved  or  animated  line.  This  difference 
of  character  in  the  two  forms  of  line  we  shall 
have  to  deal  with  again  while  investigating  the 


68    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

element  of  rhythm.  In  fact,  the  conditions  of 
animation  due  to  an  excessive  employment  of 
curved  lines  in  one  part  of  the  picture  may  easily 
lead  to  a  lopsidedness  that  may  be  hard  to  coun- 
terbalance by  other  means.  This  must  not  be 
taken  too  literally,  but  in  a  broader  sense  it  will 
be  found  true  in  many  otherwise  worthy  pic- 
tures. The  "Andromeda"  by  George  de  Forest 
Brush  may  be  used  as  an  illustration.  The  left 
side  of  the  figure  is  animated  by  a  variety  of 
curved  lines,  while  the  right  has  little  animation, 
particularly  along  the  torso.  In  consequence, 
the  balance  of  interest  is  not  very  well  main- 
tained. The  figure,  of  course,  is  physically  so 
well  balanced  on  her  feet  that  her  standing  posi- 
tion is  not  affected. 

An  effort  is  made  in  many  pictorial  composi- 
tions to  assemble  the  more  important  elements 
into  a  small  compass.  Within  it  is  found  the 
physical  pivoting  point  around  which  all  these 
many  forces  are  located.  This  point  is  easily 
established  in  a  physical  sense.  By  drawing  the 
two  diagonals,  it  will  be  found  invariably  that 
the  most  engrossing  notes  of  interest  are  found 
not  exactly  at  this  point  of  intersection,  to  avoid 
the  obvious,  but  grouped  somewhere  very  near. 


WIND  ON  THE   HILLS 


PLATE  X 


From  the  Oil  fainting  by 

\\  ii  son  Ii;\  INE 

Owned  by 

Percy  Eckhakt.  Esq..  Chicago.  111. 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  69 

These  two  diagonal  lines  are  occasionally  found 
to  be  very  emphatically  marked,  or  where  this 
has  not  been  done,  one  strong  line  from  one  cor- 
ner of  the  picture  to  the  diagonal  opposite  is 
opposed  by  a  number  of  less  obvious  parallel 
lines  of  interest,  running  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. Ettore  Tito's  well  known  "Centaur  and 
Nymphs"  is  obviously  composed  in  that  plan. 
The  picture  is  divided  into  light  and  dark  by  a 
strong  line  running  from  the  upper  left  to  the 
lower  right,  largely  caused  by  the  dark  mass  of 
foliage;  opposed  to  it  are  the  pursuing  centaurs, 
the  distant  shore,  the  foreground,  the  line  con- 
necting the  heads,  the  bodies  of  the  nymphs — all 
these  many  minor  forms  run  counter  and  create 
a  balance  of  forces  which  being  of  equal  strength 
cannot  destroy  the  equilibrium  of  the  picture. 
Thus  balance  is  well  maintained  without  being 
too  obvious. 

Another  interesting  means  of  balance  of  no 
less  importance  is  that  two  apparently  different 
things  may  easily  balance  if  placed  on  about  the 
same  spot  on  either  side  of  the  center  of  a  pic- 
ture, provided  the  pull  they  exert  is  equally 
strong,  though  based  on  different  details.  The 
"Sistine  Madonna,"  for  instance,  reveals  per- 


yo    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

feet  balance — to  be  sure  of  the  almost  symmetri- 
cal kind — in  the  divided  curtain  above,  continu- 
ing downward.  The  Christ  Child  is  opposed  by 
the  arm  and  the  headdress  falling  on  the  left 
shoulder.  The  figures  of  Pope  Sixtus  on  the  left 
and  of  St.  Barbara  on  the  right  attract  equally, 
while  the  cupids  at  the  base  are  so  near  sym- 
metry as  scarcely  to  be  interesting.  This  picture 
is  so  splendid  an  example  of  artistic  balance 
easily  recognized  that  we  must  always  admire  it 
for  its  daring  simplicity — if  one  could  get  away 
from  the  suspicion  that  it  represents  no  great 
effort  along  any  line.  Then,  also,  the  purely  in- 
tellectual significance  of  the  persons  in  a  picture 
must  be  taken  into  account.  We  always  find  the 
king,  the  president,  or  the  mayor  in  the  middle 
of  the  composition,  because  in  the  ensemble  in 
their  respective  atmospheres  they  are  the  most 
commanding  figures.  Single  out  the  socially 
most  prominent  person  in  a  figure  picture,  and 
never  in  any  well-balanced  picture  is  he  far  away 
from  the  center  of  the  canvas.  This  may  seem 
like  a  very  commonplace  observation,  but  a  vio- 
lation of  this  rule  would  be  disastrous  to  balance. 
In  Hovenden's  "Breaking  Home  Ties"  there  are 
two  groups  of  people  at  similar  opposing  points 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  71 

in  the  picture — the  lamenting  mother  and  her 
son  on  the  left,  and  the  father  and  somebody 
else  of  equal  interest  on  the  right.  It  would  be 
tiresome  to  enumerate  any  but  the  best-known 
pictures,  but  to  single  out  a  few  more  from  the 
different  fields  of  painting  is  too  tempting.  Luca 
Signorelli's  "Education  of  Pan"  at  the  Berlin 
Museum  is  another  very  telling  example  of  bal- 
ance achieved  by  the  almost  symmetrical  ar- 
rangement of  different  figures  of  equal  interest, 
and  Titian's  "  Entombment,"  in  the  Louvre,  and 
also  his  so-called  "Sacred  and  Profane  Love," 
are  distinguished  for  the  same  simplicity  of  ar- 
rangement and  well-weighed  balance.  The 
"Origin  of  the  Milky  Way,"  by  Tintoretto,  at 
the  National  Gallery,  London,  is  much  more 
daring  in  its  two  opposing  strong  diagonal  lines, 
easily  recognized.  While  frequently  obscured, 
this  method  of  achieving  balance  is  strongly 
felt.  The  "Descent  from  the  Cross,"  by  Rubens, 
at  Antwerp,  and  his  "Rape  of  the  Daughters 
of  Leucippus,"  in  the  Pinakothek  at  Munich,  are 
all  similar  in  principle.  To  the  well-trained  artist 
who  comprehends  the  rules  this  is  so  easily 
achieved  that  examples  of  bad  composition  in 
the  matter  of  balance  are  relatively  rare. 


72    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

In  dealing  with  forms  or  areas  of  tone,  with 
the  addition  of  color,  the  thing  becomes  more 
complicated,  and  more  difficult  in  consequence, 
the  general  rule  being  that  a  form  of  animated 
outline  and  of  light  tone  will  attract  more  atten- 
tion and  have  more  weight  than  a  form  of  quieter 
outline  and  dark  tone.  The  analysis  of  any  pic- 
ture will  disclose  this  fact  very  quickly.  Light 
faces,  hands,  the  extremities  generally,  will 
much  more  quickly  draw  attention  than  the 
larger,  quieter  masses  of  dress  and  background. 
For  that  reason  do  we  find  those  parts  of  figure 
pictures  always  assembled  near  the  center.  The 
lighter  and  more  animated  any  part  of  a  picture 
is,  the  more  likely  are  we  to  find  it  in  the  center. 
The  exceptions  to  that  rule  are  rare  and  diffi- 
cult to  find,  since  badly  composed  pictures 
rarely  find  their  way  into  those  collections  from 
which  examples  for  illustration  are  apt  to  be 
taken. 

In  regard  to  the  distribution  of  the  quantities 
of  light  and  dark  and  the  balance  maintained 
with  them,  it  will  be  observed  that  darker 
masses  of  a  picture  generally  exceed  the  lighter 
in  quantity,  since  a  very  much  larger  amount  of 
dark  is  necessary  to  balance  a  lighter  and  ani- 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  73 

mated  speck  in  a  picture.   It  is  a  bit  of  common 
knowledge  that  a  white  dress  is  dangerous  for 
any  woman  inclined  toward  stoutness  and  that 
a  dark  dress  is  often  almost  fatal  to  the  thin 
girl,  since  the  former  tends  toward  larger  and 
the  latter  toward  smaller  appearance;   a  fact 
which  many  misguided  people  still  refuse  to  take 
into  account  in  planning  their  dress — otherwise 
it  is  hard  to  explain  why  people  with  large  feet 
always  insist  upon  wearing  white  shoes.    What 
is  true  on  the  street  is  true  in  the  picture.    The 
optical  effect  there  is  precisely  the  same.    In  a 
crowd  on  the  street  half  a  dozen  people .  in  dark 
ocnventional  garb  will  seldom  offer  as  much  in- 
terest as  one  person  brightly  and  gayly  clad. 
This  question  of  light  and  dark  is  intimately  con- 
nected with  color,  naturally,  and  where  dark 
tones  are  associated  with  dull  colors,  nobody's 
attention  will  be  stirred,  while  light  tones  and 
brilliant  colors  will  most  pronouncedly  hold  us 
in  a  tight  grip.  Pictures  are  constructed  entirely 
on  those  principles. 

The  preliminary  sketch  for  any  ambitious 
composition  is  the  first  and  most  important  vis- 
ual step,  in  which  the  distribution  of  masses  of 
light  and  dark  must  be  settled,  without  any 


74    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

thought  of  the  detailed  delineation  of  the  indi- 
vidual elements.  The  greatest  animation  of 
form  commonly  is  observed  somewhere  near  the 
center,  or  equally  distributed  around  it.  The 
bright  and  cheery  colors  are  found  in  similar 
positions,  while  those  parts  of  a  canvas  approach- 
ing near  to  the  frame  are  mostly  negligible  in 
color  and  interest. 

A  Corot  landscape  will  seldom  have  the  man 
with  the  red  bonnet  far  from  the  middle.  A 
Keith  landscape  usually  has  its  strongest  color 
emphasis  in  the  middle.  The  poetic  moonlights 
by  Peters  present  the  illuminated  window  al- 
ways near  the  physical  center — and  so  on. 
Caser's  very  delightful  "The  Fire"  consists  of  a 
harmonic  form  of  design  of  dark  blue  accen- 
tuated by  the  complementary  orange  of  the  fire 
in  the  middle.  The  bright  blue,  orange  red,  or 
any  brilliant  note,  is  seldom  found  far  away 
from  the  center  of  a  picture,  no  matter  whether 
the  spot  represents  a  light,  a  bonnet,  the  sun,  a 
curtain,  a  door,  or  what  not.  The  picture  de- 
mands this  to  maintain  its  equilibrium,  its  bal- 
ance, and  the  well-trained  painter  knows  it.  It 
is  for  this  reason  that  the  painter  speaks  of  a 
pattern  in  a  picture,  by   which   he   means   a 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  75 

systematically  constructed  arrangement  based 
rather  on  laws  than  on  external  nature.  Only 
the  beginner  will  put  the  brightest  cow  in  his 
herd  near  the  outside  of  the  group,  and  all  his 
lamentation  that  the  cow  was  actually  there  will 
not  help  him  a  bit  with  his  intelligent  critic,  who 
knows  that  unless  there  is  another  equally  at- 
tractive element  on  the  other  side,  making  a 
similar  spot,  there  will  be  no  balance.  In  a  still- 
life  by  Carlsen,  Chase  or  Breckenridge,  the  em- 
phatic color,  the  lively,  stirring  movement,  is 
found  near  the  center.  In  figure  pictures,  par- 
ticularly in  the  case  of  drapery,  much  interest 
can  be  given  to  a  picture  by  the  opposition  of 
colors  of  differing  kind,  but  of  the  same  interest. 
For  instance,  it  is  quite  conceivable  and  of 
everyday  occurrence  that  a  blue  is  outweighed 
on  the  opposite  side  by  a  similar  quantity  of  red, 
of  the  same  strength  or  interest,  and  this  exam- 
ple must  be  sufficient  to  suggest  the  endless 
artistic  possibilities  along  this  line.  Since  I  want 
to  deal  with  color  all  by  itself  later  on,  I  shall 
refrain  from  adding  complications  to  a  subject 
already  rather  involved. 

We  find,  then,  that  balance  in  a  picture  can 
be  best  maintained  in  two  ways,  first,  by  the 


7<5    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

opposition  of  attractions  as  represented  by 
purely  abstract  elements,  either  line,  form,  or 
color,  or  by  intellectual  elements  of  equal  impor- 
tance; and  second,  by  opposition  of  unequal 
quantities,  when  a  large  quantity  of  a  quieter 
kind  will  be  outweighed  by  a  small  quantity  of  a 
more  animated  character,  or  by  small  equal  por- 
tions of  very  emphatic  note  amidst  larger,  quiet 
masses. 

Of  course  the  possibilities,  as  in  any  artistic 
field,  are  endless,  but  I  find  that  it  is  interesting 
and  profitable  to  examine  pictures  from  this 
point  of  view.  The  peculiarly  restricted  extent  of 
a  picture  is  the  immediate  cause  of  the  necessity 
for  balance.  The  psychology  of  the  picture  is 
identical  with  that  of  any  object.  Without  bal- 
ance, an  unhappy  feeling  of  disturbed  equili- 
brium will  result.  It  is  no  small  surprise,  then, 
to  find  how  the  preliminary  assembling  of  the 
facts  may  entail  for  the  artist  long  study,  care- 
ful analysis,  and  all  the  consideration  that  even- 
tuates in  a  state  of  complete  satisfaction. 

Long  after  the  intellectual  significance  and  the 
spiritual  appeal  of  the  picture  has  ceased  to  give 
concern  to  the  artist,  he  may  find  himself  shift- 
ing his  material  from  one  side  to  the   other, 


TAM.s 


PLATK  XI 


From  tin-  oil  Painting  by 

I)  SMF  I    Gakbek,  N.  A. 

Owned  by 

U  ALT!  i    S.  Davis.  Eso..  Reading.  Pa. 


BALANCE  IN  PICTURES  77 

accentuating  here,  and  there  adding  an  element, 
with  the  desire  to  achieve  repose.  Obviously 
nature  only  in  a  limited  way  offers  any  assistance 
in  this  process,  which  is  largely  dependent  upon 
scientific  reasoning.  It  is  no  wonder,  then,  that 
the  attempt  at  analysis  of  these  artistic  prin- 
ciples opens  new  avenues  of  aesthetic  pleasure 
to  the  lover  of  pictures. 


78    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED 

1  HE  element  at  once  the  most  elusive  and 
most  pleasurable  in  a  picture  discloses  itself  in 
the  aesthetic  manifestation  we  call  rhythm.  It 
furnishes,  next  to  color,  the  most  stirring  quality 
in  art.  While  balance  is  a  purely  constructive 
necessity  in  a  work  of  art,  yielding  pleasure  that 
comes  with  the  contemplation  of  good  order  and 
proper  opposition  of  weight,  and  while  harmony 
may  produce  emotional  effects,  neither  one  in 
results  is  to  be  compared  to  the  intense  delight 
which  springs  from  the  rhythmic  charm  of  a 
masterly  canvas.  A  picture  endowed  with 
rhythm  reverberates  in  the  soul  of  the  beholder, 
giving  him  the  utmost  sensation  of  life  which  can 
pulsate  in  a  picture.  While  balance  and  har- 
mony must  be  found  in  any  picture,  if  it  is  to  be 
worthy,  rhythm  is  not  essentially  necessary, 
however  frequent  a  quality  we  may  find  it  to  be. 
The  term  may  be  said  to  cover  two  distinct 
elements  recognized  in  a  picture  by  the  painter: 
First,  a  certain  clarity  of  arrangement  of  the 
subject  matter,  which  will  enable  one  to  find  his 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      79 

way  through  the  many  parts  fluently,  uninter- 
ruptedly, and  without  interference.  The  second 
and  larger  meaning  of  the  term,  as  mostly  used, 
is  a  sustained  movement,  leading  the  eye  from 
one  part  of  the  painting  to  certain  others,  and 
from  them  again  to  others,  and  so  on,  and  back 
to  thestarting  point.  As  to  the  first  meaningof  the 
term,  naturally  any  pictorial  composition  must 
be  so  arranged  as  to  result  in  an  orderly  arrange- 
ment which  will  permit  an  inspection  of  the 
various  parts  in  a  systematic  way,  free  from  con- 
fusion and  physical  involvedness.  Owing  to  the 
emphasis  of  the  middle  of  some  pictures  and  the 
subordination  of  the  remaining  parts,  the  in- 
spection will  begin  in  most  cases  with  objects 
near  the  center,  whence  certain  parts  will  be 
taken  up  invariably  in  the  same  order  by  all 
people. 

To  bring  this  subject  more  closely  to  the  un- 
derstanding of  the  average  person,  an  excursion 
into  nature  might  be  made,  to  see  how  the  god 
mother  of  all  art  in  many  ways  discloses  rhythm. 
Her  ways  are  not  always  aesthetically  satisfac- 
tory, but  from  a  purely  theoretical  point  of  view 
they  illuminate  the  subject.  In  order  to  com- 
prehend rhythm,  even  in  nature,  it  is  first  of  all 


So    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

necessary  to  know  what  brings  it  about  and  how 
it  is  attained.  The  most  widely  recognized  fac- 
tor is  perspective,  both  linear  and  aerial.  We  all 
know  that  things  seen  from  an  angle  seem  to  be- 
come gradually  smaller  as  they  are  farther  away 
from  us.  Objects  of  the  same  kind,  size,  and 
dimension,  like  a  row  of  trees  looked  at  from  an 
angle,  seem  to  diminish  gradually  with  a  most 
charming  regularity  and  consistency.  The 
wooden  posts  and  wire  fence  paralleling  the  row 
of  trees  follow  the  same  law,  as  does  the  road 
which  seems  to  narrow  down  systematically  to- 
ward a  common  point  of  confluence  on  the  hori- 
zon opposite  the  spectator.  To  complete  the 
picture,  the  equidistant  telegraph  poles  on  the 
opposite  side,  the  car-tracks  in  the  middle  of  the 
road,  all  tend  to  take  possession  of  one's  interest, 
all  with  the  sole  aim  of  forcing  one  to  travel  to  a 
certain  point.  It  is  most'convincing  to  surrender 
one's  self  to  the  overpowering  control  of  con- 
verging lines,  whether  in  nature  or  in  a  picture. 
In  the  many  architectural  pictures  of  the  Re- 
naissance this  confluence  of  lines  is  a  very  com- 
mon means  of  leading  the  beholder's  eye  toward 
the  point  reserved  for  the  Madonna  and  the 
Christ  Child.    It  worked  then  very  nicely,  but 


THE   HAY   MAKERS 


PLATE  MI 


From  the  oil  Painting  by 

COTTARDO   PlAZ/ONt 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      81 

also  very  obviously,  and  therefore  seems  often 
like  a  crude  device.  Moreover,  in  the  huge  archi- 
tectural ceiling  decorations  of  the  late  Renais- 
sance and  Baroque,  and  wherever  linear  per- 
spective is  in  evidence,  it  has  always  been  used 
as  a  simple  working  device.  It  is  unquestionably 
much  more  interesting  to  see  great  numbers  of 
the  same  things,  like  windows  in  a  facade,  in 
gradually  decreasing  sizes,  than  to  have  them  all 
appear  of  the  same  size.  This  rhythm  of  the  per- 
spective of  lines  is  best  expressed  by  the  differ- 
ence of  the  appeal  of  the  architectural  drawing 
of  the  so-called  front  elevation  type,  with  its 
stiff  and  monotonous  regularity,  and  the  some- 
times deceptive  charms  of  rhythmically  disap- 
pearing apertures  in  a  perspective  drawing.  The 
architect  knows  that  the  former  makes  no  im- 
pression, and  the  latter  has  been  forced  upon 
him  by  the  public,  which  seems  to  have  a  vague 
feeling  for  the  charm  of  rhythmic  beauty. 

The  systematic  increase  or  decrease  of  the  size 
of  objects,  as  they  are  affected  by  perspective, 
contains  a  wonderful  amount  of  beauty  which 
most  people  hardly  sense,  though  many  similar 
forms  written  on  the  face  of  nature  are  popularly 
considered  most  fascinating.     The  reasons  for 


82    PAINTERS \  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

their  appeal  are  seldom  given,  but  they  are  often 
based  on  rhythm.  The  clouds  in  the  sky,  par- 
ticularly the  small  cumulus,  often  referred  to  by 
children  as  little  lambs,  are  most  engrossing  in 
their  subtle  gradation  of  decreasing  volume. 
Many  of  the  skies  of  the  painter  seem  less  primi- 
tive when  one  studies  the  carefully  carried  out 
formula  of  rhythmic  cloud  formation.  Again, 
the  sea,  with  its  unceasing  motion,  has  more  of 
rhythmic  movement  than  any  other  of  nature's 
protean  expressions.  The  gradual  collapse  of  the 
high  waves,  spending  their  last  energies  away 
up  on  the  sand  in  faint  ripples,  have  the  irre- 
sistible fascination  of  movement  that  as  soon  as 
spent  is  recreated  by  a  never-ceasing  force. 
There  is  something  typical  in  the  manifold  sug- 
gestion of  movement  disclosed  in  the  activities 
of  the  waters  rolling  up  the  shore.  It  runs 
through  every  part  of  the  immediate  shoreland, 
not  alone  through  the  water  itself.  The  charm- 
ing decrease  in  volume  which  leads  one  from  the 
far-out  breakers  gradually  into  the  lapping 
shore-waves  is  very  pleasurable,  and  the  mean- 
ing of  its  charm  of  systematic  change  is  recog- 
nizable in  many  other  things.  The  sands  on  the 
beach,  with  their  indentations  remaining  from 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      83 

the  eddying  tide,  become  much  more  interesting 
when  one  once  recognizes  their  linear  and  form 
alignment,  which  will  always  be  found  to  con- 
tain that  element  we  know  as  rhythm.  Further 
up  the  beach,  even  debris  of  often  hygienically 
repulsive  composition  has  formed  itself  into 
curving  and  roaming  linear  arrangements  of  un- 
mistakable rhythmic  charm.  The  pebble  beaches 
of  our  California  coast  are  enchanting,  with 
their  gradually  increasing  and  decreasing  multi- 
colored pebbles,  which  seem  to  have  been  ar- 
ranged with  due  regard  for  gradual  increase  or 
decrease  in  size.  The  bigger  ones  are  near  the 
water,  the  smaller  ones  higher  up,  as  if  assorted 
and  arranged  by  some  skilled  hand.  One  could 
give  many  more  examples  of  this  sort  of  thing 
from  nature,  but  these  will  be  enough  to  show 
that  the  gradual  increase  or  decrease  of  an  ob- 
ject, whether  produced  by  perspective  or  by 
actual  physical  difference  of  size,  will  set  the 
attention  into  motion  to  travel  from  the  smallest 
toward  the  bigger,  and  yet  bigger,  or  vice  versa. 
One  must  understand  this  to  appreciate  the 
peculiar  charms  which  are  brought  about  in  pic- 
tures by  an  application  of  that  law. 
Theoretically  speaking,  the  commonest 


84    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

method  of  creating  a  feeling  of  movement  is 
merely  to  alternate  a  large  space  in  a  design 
with  a  small,  and  to  repeat  this  indefinitely. 
One  travels  from  the  large  to  the  small  with 
accelerated  motions,  to  be  caught,  possibly,  by 
some  other  rhythmic  device  which  will  lead  one 
back.  The  undulating  line,  therefore,  is  the 
artistic  line.  It  has  life.  The  straight  line  is  life- 
less. It  is  the  undulating  rhythm  of  the  female 
form  that  has  for  all  time  settled  the  greater 
artistic  value  of  Venus  over  Apollo.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  the  practice  observed  in  most  pain- 
ters of  the  academic  schools,  of  drawing  in 
curved  lines  to  round  out  and  fill  out  corners  has 
much  relation  to  this  difference  in  the  artistic 
significance  of  the  straight  and  the  curved  line. 
Rhythm  gives  that  element  to  a  picture  which 
we  may  call  swing,  that  verve  of  motion  which 
agitates  us  pleasantly,  and  which  gives  a  work 
of  art  dynamic  force.  Most  commonly,  the  un- 
dulating lines  of  rhythm  are  produced  by  the  in- 
troduction of  intervals,  that  is  to  say,  a  regu- 
larly repeated  change  of  certain  forms.  Then 
again,  our  attention  is  set  in  motion  by  the  sim- 
ple device  of  increasing  the  interest  of  a  picture 
in  a  certain  direction,  by  intensifying  drawing, 


I.VDIA 


PI.A'I  I    Mil 


From  the  Oil  Painting  hv 
Giovanni  Battista  Tro(  coli 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      8s 

and  particularly  color.  It  stands  to  reason  that 
a  more  or  less  different  pattern,  gradually  length- 
ened and  intensified  in  its  design  and  color,  will 
draw  the  eye  from  the  lightly  developed  part 
towards  the  more  expressive.  Any  sunset  will 
demonstrate  this — and  some  other  points  as 
well.  The  converging  lines  of  the  rays,  assisted 
by  the  increase  of  intensity  of  color  toward  the 
point  of  convergence,  culminating  in  the  red, 
fiery  ball,  is  so  tremendous  that  the  sun  seems 
almost  like  a  bloody  symbol  of  the  crash  of 
mighty  forces  which  culminate  in  it.  After  you 
once  get  to  the  sun,  you  can't  get  out  of  it.  The 
sunset  illustrates  again  not  only  the  dominate 
quality  of  the  converging  lines,  assisted  by  the 
increase  in  color  intensity  in  the  direction  of 
their  convergence,  but  also  shows  that  it  is  very 
easy  to  take  the  beholder  of  a  picture  into  one 
corner  or  to  any  point  from  which  there  is  no 
escape.  Since  a  picture  is  something  different 
from  a  piece  cut  out  from  nature,  it  must  pro- 
vide an  intelligent  means  of  allowing  the  eye  to 
travel  through  all  the  parts.  No  "cul  de  sac"  is 
possible,  as  in  the  sunset  picture.  Every  part 
must  be  accessible,  in  a  way  to  produce  in  the 
beholder  the  pleasures  of  contrast — light  and 


86    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

dark,    important    and   unimportant,   or   other 
pleasurable  effects  might  occur. 

It  is  this  element  of  line  movement,  of  space 
division  and  color  and  variety,  which  the  true 
artist  utilizes  to  express  his  mood.    It  was  woe- 
fully lacking  in  many  men  of  the  Diisseldorf 
School,  who  were  so  absorbed  in  the  faces  their 
people   were   making   that   the   pure   abstract 
beauty  of  a  canvas  never  could  mature.    How 
much  more  rhythmic  are  the  pictures  of  the 
Pre-Raphaelites!     What   a  wonderful   play  of 
swinging  lines  is  there  in  Moore's  goddesses  or 
in  the  ephemeral  figures  of  Dante  Gabriel  Ros- 
setti !  In  fact,  all  of  the  followers  of  the  brother- 
hood, like  Walter  Crane,  had  the  instinctive 
feeling  for  the  swinging,  singing  line.   The  most 
acutely  interesting  examples  are  the  purely  deco- 
rative figural  studies  of  Whistler.   Nobody  who 
has  any  conception  of  the  meaning  of  rhythm 
could  help  succumbing  to  the  charm  of  his  most 
tenuous  sketches  and  studies.     These  slightly 
indicated  figures  may  have  no  faces — merely 
heads  without  features   to  express  joy,  grief, 
concern,  fright;  they  need  tell  no  story:  their 
hands  may  be  undivided  masses  and  their  feet 
similarly  undeveloped.    But  a  wonderful  charm 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      87 

comes  from  them.  Their  poses  make  them 
reach  out  for  each  other.  They  speak  to  one 
another  without  visible  means  of  communica- 
tion. It  is  all  rhythmic  movement,  suggesting 
invisible  forces  tying  together  the  simple  figures 
of  these  charming  studies. 

Take  another  example,  say  the  "Forge  of 
Vulcan,"  by  Velasquez,  at  Madrid,  where  the 
eyes  are  carried  in  an  elliptical  path  from  head 
to  head,  passing  over  the  anvil  and  back  again. 
The  line  is  indefinite,  always  aiming  to  lead  the 
attention  within  the  picture  over  a  well-defined 
road.  Often  the  artist  does  not  succeed  in  mov- 
ing the  eye  over  a  certain  road  of  attraction, 
and  it  may  easily  happen  that  the  interest  is 
violently  thrown  out  of  the  picture,  much  to  the 
detriment  of  the  effect.  Any  good  picture  will 
meet  this  test,  though  it  must  not  be  used  too 
obviously.  In  figure  painting  it  is  particularly 
Rembrandt  as  in  his  "Lesson  in  Anatomy,"  at 
Amsterdam,  who  shows  how  to  manipulate 
many  heads  in  a  picture  in  such  a  way  as  to  avoid 
confusion  and  to  enable  one  to  travel  from  head 
to  head  and  back  to  the  starting-point  with  re- 
markable ease.  Rembrandt's  method  was 
largely  that  of  making  his  pictures  simple  and 


88    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

pushing  everything  back  into  the  obscurity  of 
his  luminous  background. 

Many  of  our  modern  painters  either  do  not 
possess  the  knowledge  of  these  laws,  or  if  they 
do,  do  not  use  them,  since  in  many  modern  pic- 
tures an  attempt  at  orderly  arrangement  is  too 
seldom  visible.  Rhythm  in  the  second  meaning, 
that  of  suggested  movement,  to  carry  the  eye 
through  a  picture  composed  of  sympathetic 
areas  and  along  beautiful  lines,  is  very  much 
more  difficult  to  attain.  A  picture  may  be  very 
beautiful  merely  as  a  rhythmic  design,  irrespec- 
tive of  an  intellectual  meaning.  John  W.  Alex- 
ander's "Pot  of  Basil"  at  Boston,  or  his  "Phyl- 
lis" at  St.  Louis,  are  typical.  The  folds  of  the 
gown,  while  perfectly  natural,  are  so  wonder- 
fully arranged  as  to  give  one  pleasure  merely  as 
spaces  and  as  lines.  Here  the  artist  adds  his 
knowledge  to  nature  as  only  such  a  designer  as 
Alexander  could  do. 

It  will  easily  be  seen  that  the  methods  of  pro- 
ducing rhythm  in  a  picture  are  numerous.  One 
device  frequently  employed  is  the  gradual  re- 
duction of  tone  in  a  picture,  whereby  the  eye 
begins  with  either  the  darkest  or  the  highest 
color  in  a  picture,  gradually  following  the  scale 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      89 

of  increasing  or  decreasing  tones.  It  is  a  com- 
mon expression  that  one  will  travel  through  a 
picture,  following  the  increase  or  decrease  of 
color,  which  in  most  cases  is,  of  course,  toward 
the  important  point  in  the  picture,  commonly 
located  in  the  center.  With  this  increase  or  de- 
crease in  tones,  one  must  think  of  the  assistance 
given  to  that  suggested  movement  by  perspec- 
tive, or  the  change  in  the  appearance  of  things 
that  corresponds  to  their  distance  from  the  eye. 

Any  normal  eye  will  naturally,  either  owing 
to  habit  or  to  optical  necessity,  look  first  at 
those  parts  in  a  picture  which  are  represented  as 
being  closest  to  the  eye.  For  instance,  in  a  row 
of  houses  or  trees  or  a  fence  or  a  row  of  people  in 
a  military  parade  or  a  procession,  the  eye  will 
travel  from  the  tallest  in  the  foreground  to  the 
smallest  in  the  distance.  This  progress  of  study 
is  accelerated  by  the  reduction  in  color,  giving 
those  things  in  the  foreground  the  most  brilliant 
colors,  and  those  farthest  away  little  or  no  color, 
the  loss  being  very  gradual.  The  decrease  in  size 
of  things,  owing  to  perspective,  is  so  gradual  as 
to  be  subject  to  a  fixed  law;  an  artist,  having 
recognized  this,  makes  use  of  it  in  many  ways. 

To  draw  the  attention  to  the  central  figure  in 


go     PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

a  composition,  a  device  often  employed  is  grad- 
ual increase  or  decrease  in  size  and  also  in  inten- 
sity of  color.  Some  of  the  most  trivial  and  ordi- 
nary objects  are  often  appealing  to  the  artist  for 
reason  of  their  artistic  quality  of  rhythm,  that 
wonderfully  interesting  relation  of  size  which 
leads  the  eye  pleasantly  through  the  arrange- 
ment. Water,  of  all  the  elements,  is  more  en- 
dowed with  rhythmic  motion  than  any  other. 
From  the  highest  motion  to  the  faintest  ripple 
on  the  beach,  there  is  the  rhythmic  decrease  in 
distance;  if  it  is  slighted,  the  picture  is  common- 
place. Artists  like  Hokusai,  in  his  picture  of 
the  wave,  with  the  great  Fuji  in  the  distance, 
have  demonstrated  the  beauty  of  it  to  perfec- 
tion. All  good  marine  painters  know  this  and 
utilize  it,  as  the  works  of  Alexander  Harrison, 
Emil  Carlsen,  and  Dougherty,  Waugh,  and 
Ritschel  show. 

The  recent  work  of  Woodbury,  in  some 
respects  the  master  painter  of  the  open  sea, 
depends  upon  rhythm  for  much  of  its  compel- 
ling artistic  quality. 

The  skies  of  every  season  show  in  themselves 
the  evidence  of  rhythm,  owing  to  the  influence 
of  perspective  over  form  and  color.  In  any  well- 


RHYTHM  AND  HOW  IT  IS  ATTAINED      91 

composed  sky  we  are  led  from  the  bigger  clouds 
above  us  to  the  smaller,  near  the  horizon,  par- 
ticularly on  a  moonlight  night,  with  cirrus 
clouds  above  which  seem  gradually  to  dwindle 
away  into  the  dark  horizon.  It  is  in  things  like 
these  that  the  painter  ordinarily  makes  his  work 
more  appealing  than  nature  herself,  for  nature's 
rhythm  occurs  only  at  times,  while  the  artist 
can  produce  it  whenever  he  will. 


92    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY 

r\FTER  Balance  in  a  picture,  Harmony  may 
be  taken  up  as  the  next  problem  of  the  artist. 
How  to  achieve  it  very  few  can  explain,  since,  as 
said  before,  most  artists  work  by  instinct  and 
not  by  rule — which  of  course  is  well  enough  for 
the  artist,  but  all  the  more  intricate  for  the  lay- 
man who  wants  to  know  why  certain  things  are 
done  in  one  way  and  not  in  some  other  way. 

Harmony  is  generally  understood  as  the  qual- 
ity in  a  picture  which  makes  it  appear  that  the 
many  component  parts  have  something  in  com- 
mon. Harmony,  therefore,  must  necessarily  re- 
sult in  an  expression  of  interior  accord  probably 
more  easily  recognizable  than  any  other  qual- 
ity, though  the  public  at  large  readily  falls  a 
victim  to  loud  sensations  aroused  by  the  battle 
of  elements  opposed  to  each  other.  I  begin 
again  with  the  outlines  of  a  picture.  Every 
artist  has  a  certain  characteristic  method  of 
using  lines  which  is  different  from  that  of  his 
fellow  artists.  Botticelli's  outlines  are  elegant, 
reposeful,    and    unmistakably    different    from 


CALIFORNIA   LANDSCAPE 


PLATE  XIV 


From  the  Oil  Paintinj;  by 
Carl  Oscar  Borg 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  93 

Rubens's  most  animated  but  often  agitated  lines. 

This  quality  of  Botticelli  is  found  persistently 
through  all  of  his  pictures,  and  the  same  is  rela- 
tively true  of  any  peculiar  style  of  line,  whether 
it  be  angular,  emotional,  impassioned,  like 
Rubens,  or  cool,  calm,  serene,  and  distinguished, 
as  in  the  early  Italian,  or,  again,  restrained  line, 
in  a  Whistler  design.  To  copy  a  figure  of  Rubens 
into  a  Botticelli  would  naturally  be  out  of  har- 
mony and  contrary  to  artistic  effect,  relatively 
fascinating  as  the  figure  might  be  in  its  place  in 
the  master's  own  pictures.  Hundreds  of  inter- 
esting experiments  could  be  made  among  old 
masters  as  well  as  new.  I  am  thinking  now 
merely  of  a  picture  aside  from  its  color,  with  no 
regard  for  anything  else  but  the  quality  of  line, 
which  is  different  in  the  picture  of  every  indi- 
vidual painter.  A  casual  review  of  the  chief  ex- 
ponents of  the  greatest  schools  of  painting  will 
disclose  the  truth  of  this  law  of  harmony.  Every 
part,  even  the  most  secondary,  in  the  great 
work  of  all  the  great  masters  is  in  harmony  with 
every  other  part  of  the  picture  in  the  peculiarly 
individual  manner  in  which  it  is  done.  The  one 
thing  which  gives  away  so  many  unoriginal  pic- 
tures is  their  lack  of  harmony.    They  are  com- 


94    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

posed,  frequently,  of  details  borrowed  from  a 
number  of  other  painters,  and  owing  to  their 
different  origin,  these  elements  are  not  in  in- 
terior accord.  Imagine  a  landscape  with  a 
Rousseau  tree  in  the  distance,  sharply  patterned 
against  a  clear  sky,  and  a  feathery  Corot  tree  in 
the  middle  distance.  No  matter  how  pleasing 
the  landscape  might  be  to  the  uninitiated,  it 
would  never  ring  true,  because  it  has  not  a  har- 
mony of  conception.  The  world  is  full  of  patch- 
work landscapes  of  that  type.  The  same  is  true 
of  figure-painting  where  two  or  three  types  are 
thrown  together,  and  though  compelled  to  ap- 
pear together,  refuse  to  live  in  the  same  atmos- 
phere. Harmony  of  expression  is  highly  typical 
of  the  great  men.  The  Frenchmen,  Gaston  La 
Touche,  Eugene  Carriere,  and  Puvis  de  Chav- 
annes,  are  excellent  examples  of  pronounced 
harmony.  While  the  three  are  totally  different, 
each  one's  own  method  of  drawing  and  painting 
is  most  consistent  throughout,  and  to  imagine 
one  collaborating  on  the  work  of  another  is 
almost  comical.  While  harmony  of  line  and 
form  is  less  easily  observed,  harmony  of  color  is 
more  obvious  when  present,  and  more  disturb- 
ing when  overlooked.   The  strongly  pronounced 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  95 

talents  will  furnish,  again,  the  best  example. 
While  most  pictures  of  the  older  school  excel  in 
a  harmony  of  brown,  many  modern  painters 
have  demonstrated  the  possibilities  of  other 
color  harmonies.  Twachtman  as  a  landscape 
painter  made  use  of  a  grey  tonality  in  his 
work  which  he  seldom  lost.  The  'artist  feels 
that  a  picture  is  held  together  by  this  element  of 
harmony,  and  he  feels  it  falls  to  pieces  if  not  re- 
garded in  that  light.  That  contention,  of  course, 
is  not  necessarily  based  on  an  observation  of 
nature,  but  on  an  aesthetic  consideration. 

Naturally  a  harmony  can  exist  among  ugly 
elements,  as  some  of  our  newest  productions  so 
successfully  demonstrate.  Cubist  pictures  pos- 
sess harmony  in  a  marked  degree,  since  every 
part  of  them  has  something  in  common  with 
every  other  part.  But  the  question  arises,  is  the 
result  aesthetically  pleasing?  Is  it  gratifying  to 
the  eye?  Does  it  convey  a  meaning?  However, 
one  point  must  be  borne  in  mind — that  abso- 
lute harmony  in  itself  cannot  be  recognized  un- 
less emphasized  by  a  slight  element  of  some- 
thing out  of  harmony.  In  every  part  of  a  pic- 
ture where  in  character  of  line,  in  color,  in  style, 
like  every  other  part,  the  result  might  be  mono- 


g6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

tony,  and  in  order  to  avoid  monotony  a  distinct 
note  of  contrast  is  introduced.  To  take  again 
the  delightful  pictures  of  such  a  master  as  Corot 
as  an  illustration,  the  woman  in  the  center  with 
the  red  bonnet  is  not  there  merely  by  accident. 
She  was  put  there  with  a  purpose.  The  general 
tonality  of  the  picture  is  blue-grey-green.  It  is 
bathed  in  silvery  tones,  which  for  emphasis  are 
contrasted  with  the  little  spot  of  vermillion  so 
effective  in  the  picture.  Leave  out  this  red  note 
and  the  picture  will  be  dull  and  dreary.  Many 
boutonnieres  in  well-known  portraits,  small  bits 
of  colorful  jewelry,  bright  scarfs,  give  life  to 
pictures  which  without  them  would  be  dreary 
in  spite  of  their  harmony.  Naturally  the  effects 
of  these  things  in  a  picture  are  in  principle  the 
same  as  in  nature,  where  they  are  used  the  same 
way,  although  sometimes  with  distressing  effect, 
at  the  wrong  place.  But  color,  I  say  again,  is  so 
important  that  I  shall  have  to  deal  with  the 
subject  by  itself.  Every  picture  will  disclose  to 
the  student  a  concession  to  this  law,  which  de- 
mands that  the  larger  masses  of  harmonious 
color  of  one  type  must  be  enlivened,  even  if  only 
slightly,  by  a  contrasting  note  of  opposite  or 
complementary  color.     It  is  its  characteristic 


THE  FAMILY 


PLATE  XV 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
[VAN  OLINSKY,  A.  N.  A. 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  97 

kind  of  harmony  more  than  anything  else  that 
makes  a  student,  seeing  a  picture  at  a  distance, 
know  its  painter,  recognizing  certain  character- 
istics persistently  running  through  his  whole 
work.  Moreover,  what  is  true  of  one  work  is 
found  in  practically  all  the  works  of  one  man. 

The  painter  who  has  found  himself  gives  to 
all  of  his  work  a  certain  uniform  quality  which 
in  unmistakable  in  all  of  his  work,  no  matter 
where  we  meet  him.  It  is  this  quality  by  which 
we  can  often  detect  fraud  in  a  picture,  or  assign 
certain  works  to  certain  artists.  Going  into  a 
gallery  of  Fritz  Thaulow's,  as  we  did  at  the 
Exposition  in  San  Francisco,  we  could  see  at  a 
glance  that  a  very  small  number  of  the  pictures 
in  the  room  were  evidently  not  by  this  Norwe- 
gian but  must  be  by  somebody  else,  since  in 
their  very  nature  they  were  out  of  harmony 
with  the  rest.  It  is  harmony  which  made  the 
Duveneck  gallery  so  enjoyable,  continuity  of 
style  in  Tarbell,  Redfield,  Hassam,  or  any  other 
strong  man  that  unites  in  a  very  marked  degree 
the  same  expression  of  interior  accord.  It  is  a 
quality  seldom  attained  by  beginners,  and  in- 
variably found 'in  a  master,  and  it  has  a  great 
deal  to  do  with  what  we  recognize  as  style.  We 


p8    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

are  probably  more  susceptible  to  harmony  than 
to  any  other  quality  in  a  painting,  but  strange 
to  say  the  artist  finds  very  little  evidence  that 
the  public  pays  any  attention  to  is  as  repre- 
sented in  art  or  painting,  though  in  many  other 
practical  affairs  the  absence  of  it  would  be 
keenly  felt.  We  should  see  the  humorous  note 
when  a  woman  buys  a  dress  consisting  of  sixteen 
different  kinds  of  goods,  but  people  often  do  not 
hesitate  a  moment  to  purchase  a  painting  that 
the  painter  has  heaped  magpie-like  together  from 
half  a  dozen  different  sources.  As  in  everything 
else,  parts  of  a  painting  must  appear  to  belong 
together.  They  must  express  that  affinity  which 
is  one  of  the  greatest  qualities  in  a  work  of  art, 
contributing  more  than  anything  else  to  the  one- 
ness of  expression  we  call  unity. 

While,  Balance,  Rhythm,  Harmony,  may 
occur  by  themselves,  the  culmination  of  all  de- 
sirable artistic  elements  is  possible  only  from 
their  unification.  A  work  of  art  which  has  the 
expression  of  unity,  of  oneness  of  each  and  every 
desirable  element,  is  bound  to  become  a  classic 
in  due  time.  We  have  great  works  of  art,  but 
very  few  which  seem  to  have  been  so  inspired 
in  every  particular  phase  as  to  give  you  that 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  gg 

complete  satisfaction  which  one  is  more  apt  to 
feel  than  to  be  able  to  explain.  Such  works  make 
us  breathless.  They  seem  to  command  an  atti- 
tude of  respect  and  reverence.  They  do  not 
readily  yield  to  analysis,  and  the  only  thing  we 
can  do  with  such  inspired  examples  is  to  give 
ourselves  over  to  the  peculiar  spell  they  cast 
upon  us.  If  we  run  down  the  entire  gamut  of 
the  acknowledged  classics  in  painting,  all  breathe 
that  perfection  typical  of  their  kind.  Perfection 
seems  to  exist  in  every  element,  and  their  appar- 
ent ease  of  production  seems  to  be  equal  to  their 
other  superior  qualities. 

It  is  true  that  the  monumental  in  painting  has 
never  been  the  fashion  since  the  days  of  Michael 
Angelo  or  Titian,  Velasquez  or  Rembrandt,  but 
the  .monumental  style  does  not  insure  the 
feeling  of  unity;  we  sometimes  observe  it,  even 
in  paintings  of  small  proportions.  It  must  be- 
come obvious  that  size  has  little  or  nothing  to 
do  with  unity;  indeed  it  is  more  difficult  to  con- 
trol large  surfaces  than  smaller  ones. 

My  first  feeling  before  any  truly  great  paint- 
ing, as,  for  instance,  Whistler's  "Mother,"  in 
the  Luxembourg,  or  Chase's  "Woman  with  the 
Shawl,"  at  the  Pennsylvania  Academy,  is  that  it 


ioo    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

holds  together;  that  is  to  say,  that  every  detail 
seems  to  play  its  part  in  the  concert  without  dis- 
turbing any  other  parts.  There  is  no  wrangling, 
no  agitation  nor  fuss;  everything  seems  content 
in  its  place  and  satisfied  with  its  aesthetic  re- 
sponsibilities. We  feel  about  such  paintings  just 
as  we  feel  about  great  minds,  that  they  are  per- 
fectly at  ease.  They  say  what  they  have  to  say 
simply,  they  tell  their  message  candidly,  with- 
out stuttering  and  fuss.  They  are  primarily  clear 
in  enunciation  and  articulation.  No  matter 
what  their  subject  may  be,  no  matter  what  their 
intellectual  appeal,  the  truly  great  ones  are  all 
of  that  kind.  Gari  Melcher's  well-known 
"Mother  and  Child"  in  the  possession  of  Mr. 
James  Deering  is  full  of  that  oneness  of  expres- 
sion. It  seems  to  have  been  seen  clearly  before 
it  was  started,  and  we  shall  always  regard  it 
highly  for  its  artistic  unity.  Inness's  "Georgia 
Pines,"  and  the  "Medfield  Meadows"  are  dis- 
tinctly his  greatest  works  for  unity  of  expression. 
We  easily  remember  them  all  by  their  com- 
manding qualities.  They  need  no  explanations. 
They  are  outside  the  pale  of  artistic  criticism. 
Most  often  they  are  simple  in  the  extreme,  even 
to  a  point  of  sternness,  but  always  endowed 


THE  SAGEBRUSH   TRAIL 


PI.ATKXVl 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
OSCAK  E.   BBKNINGHAUS 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  101 

with  the  telling  beauty  of  a  big  and  simple  mes- 
sage. Titian's  "Man  with  the  Glove"  at  the 
Louvre,  or  Rembrandt's  "Man  with  the  Hel- 
met" at  Berlin,  or  to  name  a  few  more,  Alex- 
ander's "Portrait  of  Walt  Whitman,"  at  the 
Metropolitan  in  New  York,  and  Tarbell's 
"Mending  Girl,"  while  produced  at  different 
times,  all  seem  inspired  in  similar  ways.  Their 
appeal  is  inherent  in  the  same  qualities.  They 
defy  analysis,  but,  as  already  indicated,  their 
chief  asset  is  simplicity  in  every  element.  Sim- 
plicity of  expression,  then,  has  apparently  a 
great  deal  to  do  with  their  artistic  powers,  and 
I  firmly  believe  that  the  agitated  fussiness  of  the 
small-calibered  painting  mitigates  against  its 
lasting  effect  upon  our  senses. 

All  declining  periods  of  art  have  been  marked 
by  a  loss  of  simplicity,  and  by  substituting  for 
the  candid  presentation  of  one  single  phase  the 
irritating  and  scattered  expression  of  many  con- 
tributing elements.  The  calm  serenity  of  a 
Leonardo  is  essentially  present  in  a  marine  by 
Homer.  We  feel  the  same  quality  in  two  totally 
different  subjects.  It  is  a  certain  bigness  that 
cannot  be  accomplished  where  there  is  not  sub- 
ordination of  every  detail  to  a  single  predomi- 


W2    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

nant  expression  of  greater  appeal.  The  thrill  we 
get  from  a  Velasquez  is  one  that  springs  from 
the  bold  characterization  of  the  outstanding 
qualities  of  his  personages.  We  call  it  style,  but 
it  is  the  big  style,  the  influence  of  grandeur,  that 
is  the  element  that  appeals  to  us.  Moreover,  it 
is  the  quality  which  permits  us  to  grasp  the  full 
meaning  of  a  painting  at  once.  Only  when  we 
can  include  the  entire  significance  of  a  painting 
in  one  visual  attack  do  we  seem  to  feel  the  qual- 
ity of  oneness. 

The  size  of  a  painting  has  little  or  nothing  to 
do  with  this;  it  is  entirely  a  question  of  principle. 
The  problem  of  painting  our  great  western 
scenic  assets  is  of  acute  interest  in  the  task  of 
preserving  their  unity,  a  quality  which  we  feel 
in  them  in  nature  and  which  we  rarely  observe 
in  their  pictorial  representation.  What  has  be- 
come of  the  enthralling  feeling  of  overpowering 
magnitude  of  the  Grand  Canon  in  the  petty  de- 
pictions of  some  of  our  popular  painters?  It  has 
not  been  achieved  and  never  will  be,  until  some 
modern  Michael  Angelo  solves  the  problem  of 
artistic  unity  that  presents  itself  in  the  great 
mountain  architecture  of  our  incomparable  coun- 
try.   The  great  scenic  wonders  of  our  country 


HARMONY  AND  UNITY  ioj 

still  await  the  day  when  their  message  will  be 
carried  through  artistic  means  into  the  world  to 
everybody,  not  only  to  those  who  have  actually 
enjoyed  them  in  reality  and  can  furnish  the 
thrill  that  is  lacking  in  the  picture  by  a  spiritual 
revival  of  their  own  memory,  their  own  experi- 
ence. Difficult  as  it  is  to  get  unity  into  a  work 
of  art — so  certain  are  we  of  its  commanding 
quality  whenever  it  exists  in  a  painting.  The 
imitation  of  even  the  simplest  expression  of  na- 
ture will  not  insure  its  presence  in  a  painting, 
as  we  may  readily  observe  in  many  paintings 
which,  while  they  may  be  simple,  are  neverthe- 
less lacking  in  unity  because  the  painter  has 
treated  them  without  concentration  upon  the 
spirit  of  things,  of  which  he  has  merely  painted 
the  shell.  The  power  to  paint  the  spirit  of  the 
thing  is  a  gift;  it  is  what  we  call  talent,  and  when 
it  is  superlatively  well  done,  we  recognize  genius. 
Modern  art  is  less  concerned  about  the  spiritual 
than  were  the  old  masters,  whose  calm  unity  of 
beauty  deteriorated  into  much  sentimentality. 
It  was  logical,  then,  that  art  should  become  en- 
gaged in  the  representation  of  externals  without 
paying  much  tribute  to  the  soul  of  a  subject. 
In  external  representation   I  think  we  are  as 


W4    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

efficient  as  any,  but  I  doubt  whether  we  asso- 
ciate with  it  a  valid  psychology  of  the  subject 
such  as  the  old  masters  achieved,  and  therefore 
unity  has  ceased  to  be  so  potent  a  factor  in  our 
days.  It  has  become  the  tendency  of  the  age 
to  pick  out  a  single  element  in  a  painting  and 
dwell  upon  it,  omitting  whatever  other  quality 
might  demand  recognition  in  a  subject.  Some- 
times it  is  rhythm,  or  color  harmony,  or  vibra- 
tion, or  again,  light,  or  what  not,  that  is  the  sole 
moving  force  in  a  picture,  and  we  are  given  to 
understand  that  we  must  not  look  for  anything 
else.  That  sort  of  painting  can  be  only  sympa- 
thetic in  demonstrating  principles,  but  rarely  will 
we  get  a  complete  all-round  thrill  of  utmost  satis- 
faction such  as  we  get  from  Terborch's  "Musi- 
cian" at  the  British  Museum,  or  Rembrandt's 
portrait  of  a  Polish  Nobleman  at  the  Hermitage 
at  Petrograd.  They  are  complete  in  every  de- 
tail. They  are  positive,  and  still  they  leave  room 
for  suggestive  interpretation. 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST    105 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST 

ESSENTIALLY,  color  is  the  one  element  in  a 
painting  which  ought  to  furnish  the  raison  d'etre 
for  its  existence.  It  is  the  one  element  in  art 
which  decides  whether  architecture,  sculpture, 
music,  or  poetry  shall  be  the  affinity  of  the  ar- 
tistically producing.  Of  all  visible  features  in  a 
painting,  color  should  hold  most  attraction  to 
most  people,  artist  and  public  alike.  It  is  the 
color  element  in  a  painting  which  lures  people 
into  the  painting  profession,  a  lure  which  must 
be  very  enticing  when  one  considers  the  vast 
hordes  of  painters  as  compared  with  architec- 
tects  and  sculptors.  The  very  earliest  known 
use  of  paint,  by  the  Egyptians  and  Assyrians, 
was  a  genuine  demonstration  of  their  love  of 
color  for  itself.  Color  has  a  very  wide  range  of 
effect  upon  different  people,  and  we  are  just 
now  treated  to  the  spectacle  of  some  very  recent 
artists,  cubists  and  futurists,  post-impression- 
ists in  general,  who  are  trying  to  dish  up  to  us 
as  a  new  thing,  the  symbolism  of  color,  which 
has  existed  since  time  immemorial.    The  use  of 


io6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

color  to  symbolize  human  emotion,  passion,  or 
sorrow  is  no  new  thing,  merely  a  primitive  thing 
which  has  nothing  to  do  with  painting  directly, 
though  often  brought  into  play,  as  I  will  try  to 
point  out  later  on.  The  relation  of  color  to  music 
is  closely  akin  to  the  visual  rhythm  element  and 
an  attempt  to  represent  color  by  a  color  code. 
These  experiments  belong  scarcely  in  the  studio, 
but  rather  in  the  laboratory  of  the  professor  of 
psychology,  who  will  probably  be  much  more 
sympathetically  inclined  toward  all  this  new 
movement  than  the  painter's  profession. 

The  color  problem  of  the  artist  is  different 
with  every  painter,  and  while  some  painters 
manage  to  get  along  with  very  little  color,  having 
more  pleasure  in  form  and  neutral  values,  the 
great  majority  consider  color  a  most  essential 
element  in  their  work,  whether  they  are  easel 
painters,  or  concerned  with  decoration  or  any 
other  artistic  problem  involving  adornment  of 
flat  surfaces.  With  the  modern  development  of 
chemistry,  no  known  hue  is  denied  the  profes- 
sion in  their  striving  for  original  expression  of 
color.  It  would  be  impossible  here  to  go  into  the 
technical  side  of  painting,  as  based  on  the  pro- 
duction and  behavior  of  paints,  but  it  can  safely 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST    107 

be  said  that  no  color  of  the  spectrum  but  could 
be  produced  in  permanent  quality  for  the  use  of 
the  painter.  Whether  this  is  a  blessing  or  a  dis- 
advantage is  hard  to  tell,  as  it  is  yet  too  soon  to 
come  to  any  definite  conclusion  in  regard  to  the 
comparative  lasting  qualities  of  the  picture  of 
the  schools  since  the  beginning  of  Impression- 
ism, and  the  gay  and  vivid  color  schemes  of 
recent  schools. 

The  grudge  that  many  sympathizers  of  the 
modern  school  have  against  the  old  school  is  that 
they  get  tired  of  the  brown  pictures,  the  endless 
rows  of  brown  pictures,  with  the  occasional  re- 
lief afforded  by  the  few  pictures  of  the  greatest — 
such  as  Titian,  Tiepolo,  Rubens,  Van  Dyck,  the 
great  Englishman  of  the  eighteenth  century,  and 
others.  Even  then  while  there  is  an  occasional 
flaring  up  of  color  passion,  it  is  always  on  the 
brown  foundation,  the  brown  background.  The 
use  of  color  in  those  days  was  a  formula,  as  com- 
pared with  the  freedom  practiced  in  our  day. 
The  many  things  that  may  be  said  against  the 
brown  picture  will,  however,  not  set  aside  the 
great  truth  that  brown  as  the  controlling  hue  in 
a  picture  is  far  more  agreeable  than  blue. 

In  order  to  explain  this  contention,  one  has 


io8    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

to  go  into  the  psychology  of  color,  which  is  one 
of  the  most  interesting  of  subjects  to  study  and 
a  source  of  never-ending  pleasure.  We  all  learn 
early  in  life,  almost  in  our  kindergarten  days, 
symbolic  meanings  of  color  as  closely  associated 
with  psychial  experiences  and  conditions.  Red 
and  hate,  yellow  and  envy,  blue  and  purity, 
green  and  hope,  purple  and  depression,  and  so 
on,  are  so  closely  associated  in  our  minds  that 
one  is  tempted  to  ask  whether  certain  of  our 
newest  and  most  ardent  color  experimentalists 
ever  went  to  kindergarten,  or  whether  they 
thought  that  the  public  never  did. 

One  very  important  element  in  color  appre- 
ciation and  enjoyment  is  the  difference  between 
warm  and  cold  colors.  We  find  the  explanation 
of  this  difference  in  our  physical  experience, 
which  is  to  the  effect  that  those  natural  ele- 
mental forces  which  produce  comfort  and  warmth 
are  associated  with  red — a  certain  red  closely 
resembling  a  reddish  orange.  The  first  thing  we 
think  of  in  that  relation  is  the  fire,  then  also  the 
setting  sun,  possibly  also  the  color  of  blood,  as 
the  life  element  in  our  body.  Our  whole  inclina- 
tion is  to  look  for  red,  and  anything  related  to 
red  or  with  a  preponderance  of  that  kind  of  red 


r, 


PORTRAIT 


PLATE  XV 11 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Clarence  Hinkle 
Owned  by 

K.  \Y.  Hoi  1  man.  Sun  Francisco,  Cal. 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST    109 

is  described  as  a  source  of  physical  pleasure. 
On  the  other  hand,  a  certain  sense  of  coldness 
overcomes  us  in  the  presence  of  large  quantities 
of  a  certain  blue — the  blue  of  the  glacier,  of  ice, 
of  night — and  we  have  learned  to  associate  that 
color  with  physically  discomforting  sensations. 
Carried  into  art  as  almost  a  law,  we  have  be- 
come so  used  to  it  that  it  was  the  chief  cause  of 
the  opposition  of  the  old  school  to  the  new,  with 
the  introduction  of  Impressionistic  painting. 
Constable  is  generally  spoken  of  as  the  first  one 
to  break  away  from  the  brown  "sauce,"  when 
he  had  the  then  preposterous  idea  of  wanting  to 
paint  a  landscape  out-of-doors.  To  us  nowadays 
the  idea  of  wanting  to  paint  at  least  the  prelimi- 
nary studies  outdoors  is  a  sacred  law.  Constable 
is  credited  with  having  first  had  the  courage  to 
paint  blue  shadows.  It  really  matters  little 
whether  Constable  was  the  first  man  or  not,  but 
one  thing  seems  certain — that  he  created  a  com- 
motion in  1823  by  the  first  exhibited  work 
representing  his  new  venture. 

The  brown  picture,  to  return  to  it  once  more, 
was  really  little  in  danger  of  offending  by  its 
relative  lack  of  color  since  the  many  warm  gra- 
dations were  invariably  pleasing.     What  sym- 


no    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

phonies  of  rich  and  luscious  browns  some  men 
achieved  is  best  indicated  by  the  work  of  Rem- 
brandt, who  surpassed  any  painter  of  his  day 
and  who  has  never  since  been  equalled  in  lumi- 
nosity. I  have  spoken  in  another  chapter  of  the 
"frotte"  and  its  generally  brown  or  reddish 
tone.  The  nuance  of  brown  varies  with  the 
artist,  but  as  an  undertone  it  seems  still  to  be 
cherished  even  by  many  very  modern  painters. 
Not  only  the  idea  of  warm  and  cold  colors,  but 
the  whole  question  of  color  resolves  itself  into 
an  absolutely  demonstrable  science,  of  which  the 
average  talented  painter  gets  control  as  a  pres- 
ent at  birth,  and  which  scientists,  regard  as  a 
series  of  simple  facts,  demonstrable  in  many 
ways.  We  hear  a  great  deal  of  complementary 
colors  and  their  use  in  artistic  expression,  and  to 
most  people  this  term  is  another  one  of  the  stu- 
dio mysteries  which  the  artist  himself  rarely 
bothers  to  explain.  He  knows  he  would  not  be  a 
painter  if  he  did  not  have  a  sense  of  color,  in- 
cluding the  use  of  complementary  color,  so  why 
bother  about  the  why  and  wherefore?  However, 
people  are  curious.  Beginning  with  the  spec- 
trum, the  basis  of  all  color  themes,  we  find  that 
the  twelve  colors  running  from  red  to  violet  are 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST    in 

all  very  beautiful  in  their  own  way,  but  that  the 
effect  of  any  one  can  be  much  enhanced  by  the 
close  proximity  of  some  other  color  than  the  one 
immediately  preceding  or  following  in  the  spec- 
trum. We  know  that  a  physical  experience  is 
the  basis  for  the  grouping  of  colors  as  comple- 
mentary colors.  If  we  look  with  a  fixed  stare  for 
a  short  time  at  a  vivid  red,  and  at  the  first  feel- 
ing of  exhaustion  turn  to  a  blank  space  of  neu- 
tral or  white  tone,  we  behold  a  spot  of  green. 
If  the  first  color  looked  at  was  violet,  it  will  be  a 
certain  yellow;  if  red — violet;  yellow — green;  if 
orange — yellow;  violet — blue,  and  so  on.  In 
other  words,  the  directly  opposite  color  seems  to 
be  the  one  which  will  afford  the  greatest  amount 
of  relief.  The  skilled  artist  gives  constant  pleas- 
ure by  his  intelligent  application  of  this  law,  and 
to  examine  pictures  for  this  point  alone  is  inter- 
esting in  the  extreme.  The  most  common  exam- 
ple is  that  of  the  combination  of  blue-green  and 
red,  the  two  colors  most  frequently  used  as 
complementary.  That  large  red  areas  are  op- 
posed by  green  or  blue-green  areas  in  all  of  the 
Renaissance  Madonnas  is  too  well  known  to 
need  to  be  dealt  with  at  length. 

In  landscape  painting  we  have  the  delightful 


ii2  PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

examples  of  Corot,  who  very  cunningly  and 
effectively  introduced  his  red-bonneted  peasant 
to  give  life  to  the  pleasant  greens  in  his  land- 
scape. Omit  the  red  nuance,  and  how  dreary  and 
lifeless  those  otherwise  refreshing  landscapes 
would  be.  With  all  due  regard  to  the  old  mas- 
ters, our  appreciation  of  color  has  become  much 
more  subjective  in  our  own  time  than  during 
the  so-called  great  periods  of  art.  The  clever 
use  of  two  complementary  colors  against  large 
masses  of  neutral  tones  is  Whistler's  chief  con- 
tribution to  modern  art.  His  refined,  sensitive 
color-arrangements  of  flesh  color  and  black, 
green  and  violet,  and  the  many'  other  possible 
combinations  were  never  thought  of  before  his 
day.  He  carried  his  aesthetic  appreciation  of  the 
abstract  relation  of  colors  into  less  pictorial  rep- 
resentations, to  the  astonishment  of  his  contem- 
poraries. Whistler  invariably  encourages  and 
incites  comparison,  and  he  represents  one  pole 
as  much  as  Rubens  represents  another,  not  only 
in  color  but  in  general  style — as  well  as  in  every- 
thing else. 

What  remarkable  changes  have  taken  place 
in  the  color  aspect  of  the  painter's  art!  First  we 
had  for  a  long  time  the  vigorous  contrasts  of 


AFTERNOON 


PLATK  .Will 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Arthur  F.  Mathews 

Owned  by  the 

Metropolitan  Museum,  New  York 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST     113 

the  brown  based  picture,  then  the  remarkable 
change  to  the  cool  grey  of  the  pleinairist  and  the 
impressionist,  and  now  again  the  demand  for 
vigorous,  lively  color,  as  stirring  and  stimulating 
as  it  ever  has  been.  The  exhibitions  of  the 
eighties  and  nineties,  with  their  acres  of  grey 
and  silvery  canvases,  are  still  in  our  memories, 
and  now  we  have  the  evidences  on  our  exhibi- 
tion walls  that  pure  primary  colors  are  not  at  all 
too  striking  if  properly  handled.  Such  canvases 
as  Raymond  P.  R.  Neilson's  have  attracted 
much  attention  of  artists  and  public  alike,  and  as 
color  pattern  they  surpass  anything  done  here- 
tofore. Neilson's  art  is  typical  of  the  age,  which 
is  an  age  of  contrasts  highly  seasoned  but  not 
devoid  of  a  wonderful  charm  of  personal  style. 
Frieseke's  art,  while  not  possessed  of  the  placid 
surfaces  one  admires  in  Neilson,  has  color  un- 
bounded, and  this  element  is  a  special  charm  in  his 
always  carefully  considered  compositions.  Ran- 
dall Davey,  Gifford  Beal,  and  Robert  Henri  have 
gone  beyond  anything  ever  attempted  in  the  use 
of  almost  pure  colors  with  often  singular  success. 
The  tone  picture  in  this  age  of  color  has  no 
chance  at  all.  It  isn't  even  looked  at.  It  does 
not  seem  that  ours  is  the  period  of  the  tonal 


ii4    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

picture  at  all.  The  aristocratic  tonal  dignity  of 
a  Mathews  is  sometimes  interpreted  as  weak- 
ness, and  many  other  tonal  compositions  find  a 
like  reception.  It  is  scarcely  to  be  expected  that 
the  large  public  should  at  once  appreciate  the 
noble  restraint  and  enduring  quality  of  the  low- 
toned  "Art  and  Nature"  by  Mathews,  but  the 
greatest  of  all  low-toned  painters,  Whistler,  even 
in  a  period  of  the  grey  tonality  of  the  French- 
man Bastien-Lepage,  did  not  arouse  any  more 
popular  interest  than  the  man  of  restrained  color 
schemes  today.  The  tonal  picture  has  always  to 
contend  with  the  accusation  of  being  anaemic 
and  arbitrary  and  remote  from  nature,  and  the 
whole  thing  resolves  itself  again  into  the  ques- 
tion of  imitation  or  translation  of  nature. 
Doubtless  nowadays  many  ambitious  young 
painters  imagine  their  work  is  full  of  color  when 
it  is  merely  full  of  different  paints,  and  this  dif- 
ference of  meaning  is  surely  worthy  of  more 
recognition  than  many  modern  artists  care  to 
give  it.  To  use  a  great  many  different  paints  on 
a  canvas  is  hardly  more  than  a  sign-painter's 
performance,  but  to  intelligently  gauge  a  num- 
ber of  colors  so  as  to  produce  a  harmony  is 
another  thing. 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST     115 

Harmony  has  been  said  to  be  a  condition  where- 
in a  number  of  things  have  something  in  common, 
where  an  invisible  inner  accord  exists.  How 
many  pictures  really  give  one  this  feeling  of  an 
inner  accord,  of  having  something  in  common 
among  themselves?  This  harmony — this  being 
of  the  same  kind,  so  to  speak — is  the  strength  of 
the  low-toned  tonal  picture,  and  it  is  a  very 
enduring  quality.  It  is  largely  the  harmony  of 
analogous  colors,  as  opposed  to  the  color  scheme 
of  opposing  colors  held  together  by  other  quali- 
ties of  relationship.  The  amount  of  color  which 
an  artist  sees  in  nature  differs  with  every  artist, 
and  it  is  this  divergence  which  makes  paintings 
so  interesting.  Many  pictures  look  very  much 
better  in  black  and  white,  while  others  seem  to 
lose  without  their  color.  Is  this  largely  a  matter 
of  deception  ?  Often  a  picture  with  very  vigorous 
color,  but  of  poor  tone  values  that  mean  a  bad 
relation  of  light  and  dark  in  its  many  grada- 
tions, deceives  one  regarding  this  lack  of  values, 
and  reproduced  in  black  and  white  seems  like 
a  different  work,  unpleasing  and  of  no  conse- 
quence. On  the  other  hand,  some  of  those  very 
fascinating  modern  decorative  canvases  are 
never  lacking  in  interest  even  if  seen  in  black 


u6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

and  white.  This  is  particularly  true  of  the 
smaller  outdoor  Friesekes  and  of  his  big  toilette 
scenes  in  ivory  and  greys  and  greens.  Bellows's 
"  Polo  Players  "  in  the  original  does  not  satisfy  so 
well  as  in  black  and  white.  The  red  in  the  man's 
coat  is  metallic  and  of  no  moment  in  a  canvas 
which  holds  by  its  dynamic,  forceful  painting. 

A  closer  examination  of  many  paintings  dis- 
closes in  a  general  way  two  types  of  color  expres- 
sion— the  complementary  opposition  of  different 
colors  and  the  combination  of  analogous  colors. 
The  first,  and  chronologically  older  type,  pre- 
vails in  almost  all  of  the  work  of  the  older  schools 
up  to  the  middle  of  the  last  century,  when  there 
appeared  the  arbitrary  tonal  arrangement, 
which  finds  its  highest  expression  in  Carriere, 
Puvis,  and  Whistler.  The  brown  undertone  of 
the  Renaissance  masters,  supporting  rich  areas 
of  opposing  blues  and  reds — such  they  mostly 
were — is  a  common  feature  of  many  pictures. 
We  meet  with  this  in  Raphael  as  well  as  in 
Murillo,  and  later  on  in  the  Hollanders  and 
Englishmen.  Most  of  these  older  works  were 
decidedly  dark  in  tone,  and  often  obscure.  But 
from  their  dark  foundation  the  opposing  notes 
of  red  and  blue  would  often  rise  to  strike  a  sym- 


DESPAIR 


Pl.ATi:  XIX 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 

PERHAM    W  .     N  AIM. 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST     117 

pathetic  chord.  The  pictures  absolutely  devoid 
of  color  and  expressed  merely  in  the  meaningless 
contrasts  of  light  and  dark  that  we  see  in  some 
of  the  galleries  of  Europe  are  unique  in  demon- 
strating the  superiority  of  sculpture  as  a  means 
for  plastic  representation.  These  "grisaille"  pic- 
tures, as  they  are  called,  painted  in  many  greys, 
seem  lamentably  uninteresting  for  their  abso- 
lute lack  of  color.  The  analogous  color  schemes 
of  certain  modern  masters  are  so  removed  from 
the  pictures  of  the  earlier  schools  that  it  would 
be  futile  to  look  for  any  relation  between  them. 
Carriere's  low-toned  scales  of  a  certain  purplish 
brown,  almost  monochromatic  in  their  elimina- 
tion of  any  strong  note,  suggest  this  type  better 
than  the  work  of  any  other  master.  It  may  have 
been  the  influence  of  the  greys  of  the  modern 
schools  which  produced  such  charming  ranges  of 
color  gradation.  The  chief  difference  between 
the  old  and  the  modern  is  largely  explained  by 
the  substitution  of  a  cool  grey  for  a  warm 
brown.  If  we  were  to  take  a  Tiepolo  or  Titian 
and  substitute  for  the  brownish  middle  tones 
the  same  range  of  dark  and  light  blue  violet 
greys,  the  color,  as  represented  by  blue-greens, 
red-purples,    and   yellows,   would   remain   un- 


u8    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

changed.  The  bath  of  golden  browns  in  which 
we  see  the  many  colors  swimming,  has  in  modern 
art  given  room  to  the  neutral  grey  of  the  outdoor 
atmosphere  of  the  student  of  nature.  Often  the 
effect  is  less  appealing  because,  as  indicated 
above,  the  golden  brown  of  the  old  canvases  is 
psychologically  more  sympathetic  than  the  blue- 
grey  of  the  modern  school.  How  great  were  the 
possibilities  of  using  many  hues  or  color  nuances 
was  first  demonstrated  by  Monet,  who  painted 
a  series  of  pictures  of  the  same  subject,  identical 
in  composition  and  facts,  but  each  in  a  different 
hue.  His  scenes  of  the  Seine  in  Paris  run  from 
the  pale  blue-grey  of  the  early  morning  through 
the  yellowish  light  of  midday  into  the  purplish 
hazes  of  the  late  afternoon  and  the  dark  blue- 
green  of  the  night.  All  the  pictures  are  identical 
in  subject,  but  different  in  that  each  is  based 
upon  a  different  prevailing  color.  Such  color  con- 
ceptions were  unknown  before  his  time,  and 
eventually  they  opened  the  eyes  of  the  artist  to 
a  better  perception  of  color,  until  now  we  live  in 
an  age  of  art  where  color  has  first  rank  in  the  ex- 
pression of  the  artistic  individuality.  No  matter 
what  may  be  one's  quarrel  with  modern  art,  one 
thing  must  impress  itself  upon  even  the  most  re- 


WHAT  COLOR  MEANS  TO  AN  ARTIST      119 

actionary  admirer  of  the  studio  brown  of  by-gone 
periods — that  in  daring  opposition  of  intense 
colors  and  vigor  of  contrast  many  of  our  modern 
painters  are  achieving  vital  expressions  which  are 
bound  to  command  respect  and  admiration. 

Color  may  be  said  to  epitomize  the  spirit  of 
modern  art,  and  whatever  of  the  trivial  we  may 
observe,  no  matter  how  lax  in  technical  execu- 
tion many  of  our  moderns  may  be  in  their  vital 
color,  they  express  both  daring  and  joy.  Never 
before  has  painting  been  so  independent  in 
accentuating  the  one  feature  which  none  of  the 
other  arts  can  equal — the  element  of  color. 
Arthur  Carles's  nudes  and  Breckenridge's  recent 
still-lifes,  are  excellent  examples  of  the  clarifica- 
tion of  color  in  our  art.  The  decorative  and 
highly  imaginative  art  of  Bertram  Hartmann 
vibrates  with  color  such  as  we  have  seen  only 
suggested  before,  and  the  virile  art  of  Brangwyn 
discloses  a  daring  juxtaposition  of  colors  which 
disarms  all  efforts  at  comparison  with  any  art 
past  and  present.  We  are  living  in  an  age  of 
color,  and  the  life  which  modern  art  owes  to  this 
element  will  not  be  least  in  fixing,  ultimately, 
the  position  of  present-day  art  in  the  history  of 
the  evolution  of  aesthetic  expression. 


120   PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT 

UF  ALL  the  many  phases  of  painting  none  is 
regarded  by  the  public  with  so  little  interest  as 
the  purely  technical.  The  public  naturally  finds 
it  distasteful  to  admit  profound  ignorance  on 
the  subject  of  technique,  and  prefers  to  leave 
that  part  of  painting  to  be  enjoyed  exclusively 
by  the  artist.  The  often-charged  capriciousness 
of  the  painter  has  a  good  deal  to  do  with  this 
intricate  question.  Very,  very  seldom  do  artist 
and  layman  agree  upon  the  best  picture  in  a 
show,  because  the  painter  persistently,  before 
any  other  phase  is  taken  up,  wants  to  satisfy 
himself  that  the  paint  is  put  on  the  canvas  in 
such  a  way  as  to  earn  his  professional  approval. 
The  layman  immediately,  on  the  other  hand, 
proceeds  to  look  for  the  intellectual  appeal  of 
the  canvas,  and  the  war  is  started.  If  we  were 
to  be  as  logical  with  painting  as  we  are  with 
other  things  when  it  comes  to  the  question  of 
technical  production,  we  should  quickly  remove 
a  great  stumbling  block  in  the  path  of  the  appre- 
ciative, willing  layman,  who  is  often  inclined  to 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT         121 

give  it  all  up,  so  to  speak,  from  sheer  desperation 
over  the  question  of  technique.  We  can  scarcely 
blame  the  painter,  as  I  shall  endeavor  to  point 
out,  and  the  layman  deserves  sympathy  for  the 
reason  that  perception  of  technical  excellence  is 
in  a  measure  dependent  upon  technical  experi- 
ence. My  friends  those  art  critics  who  have 
entered  the  field  from  the  purely  aesthetic  and 
literary  side  will  heartily  disagree,  but  the  fact 
remains  that  all  painters  look  with  grave  sus- 
picion upon  the  average  art  critic's  innocence  of 
technical  experience. 

Since  painting  is  a  most  individual  exercise, 
it  is  no  wonder  that  the  method  of  disposing  the 
pigment  upon  the  canvas  presents  another  in- 
stance where  a  stereotyped  method  must  not  be 
expected.  Even  in  the  various  periods  of  tech- 
nique, if  we  can  speak  of  them  so,  we  find  a 
variety  of  technical  usages  which  add  much  to 
the  involved  character  of  painting.  In  the  ear- 
lier days,  when  painting  was  largely  an  imitative 
effort,  the  technique  was  concealed,  care  being 
invariably  taken  by  the  artist  not  to  disclose  his 
technical  procedures  at  all,  for  fear  of  spoiling 
the  illusion  of  his  purely  imitative  handiwork. 
That  attitude  certainly  still  prevails  with  a  very 


122    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

large  part  of  the  public,  and  even  with  some 
very  few  painters  of  the  present  day  who  are 
inclined,  like  their  predecessors,  to  let  their 
work  be  carried  by  the  sober  fact,  without  any 
expression  of  a  man's  own  skill  in  the  handling 
of  his  material.  As  the  possibilities  of  painting 
were  discovered,  painters  gradually  grew  to  ap- 
preciate the  difference  between  the  skillful  and 
the  unskillful,  the  easy  and  the  difficult.  This 
question  of  skill  offers  to  the  artist  a  much 
larger  field  of  enjoyment  than  the  public  gen- 
erally is  aware  of.  The  painter,  having  had  prac- 
tical experience,  knows  full  well  what  is  difficult 
and  what  is  easy  to  do,  and  he  has  formed  his 
technical  ideal  accordingly — and  I  might  say 
that  essentially  this  does  not  differ  with  different 
painters.  The  public — not  to  lose  sight  of  its 
attitude — is  on  the  whole  convinced  that  so  to 
execute  a  painting  as  to  destroy  all  evidences  of 
how  it  is  done  is  most  difficult,  and  accordingly 
admires  immensely  paintings  resembling  in 
smoothness  of  finish  a  colored  photograph.  It 
is  this  naive  enthusiasm  which  drives  the  aver- 
age painter  into  frenzies  of  fury  and  agonies  of 
despair,  and  which  often  turns  his  interest  per- 
manently away  from  even  hoping  to  find  any 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        123 

sympathy  from  the  public  for  his  technical  point 
of  view.  The  public  fortifies  itself  behind  the 
belief  that  all  the  great  masters  "did  it  that 
way,"  pointing  with  great  pride  at  Raphael's 
Madonnas  and  Leonardo's  smiling  lady,  beside 
these  any  number  of  painters  of  polished 
doll  faces  now  long  since  surpassed  in  freshness 
of  execution,  finish  of  appearance,  and  spon- 
taneity of  method.  It  is  true  that  nothing  like 
Leonardo's  "Mona  Lisa"  has  ever  since  been 
painted,  but  we  ought  not  to  forget  that  it  is  her 
subtle  smile,  her  calm  serenity,  which  is  so  com- 
pelling, and  not  the  very  cautious  method  of 
painting.  We  have  vastly  improved  since  then 
in  representing  texture — the  differing  qualities 
of  different  surfaces.  The  faces  of  the  Madonnas 
of  Gari  Melchers  are  just  as  exhaustive  individ- 
ual studies  as  any  of  the  old  papery  kind,  but 
possess  a  certain  added  charm  of  life,  of  vitality, 
which  the  older  painters  seldom  attained.  The 
old  methods  of  painting  were  generally  speak- 
ing thin,  though  not  invariably  so,  as  certain 
exceptional  painters  like  Tintoretto  or  Velasquez 
will  instance.  It  was  not  necessary  to  resort  to 
any  heavy  or  opaque  painting  to  represent  the 
indoor  subjects,  generally  dark  in  tones.   The 


124    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

necessity  for  a  technical  change  did  not  develop 
until  the  problem  of  outdoor  painting  forced  the 
painters  before  they  were  quite  aware  of  it  into 
a  heavier  application  of  paint,  which  on  the 
whole  seems  to  most  laymen  a  technically  in- 
ferior method  indicating  the  less  accomplished 
painter.  When  Constable  and  his  French  fol- 
lowers, the  Barbizon  men,  went  outdoors,  the 
necessity  of  rapid  work  did  not  allow  the  careful 
gauging  of  the  quantity  of  paint,  to  the  detri- 
ment in  the  popular  eye  of  the  appearance  of 
their  canvases. 

This  laid  the  foundation  for  what  was  to  come 
in  the  seventies,  what  is  known  as  Impressionis- 
tic painting,  an  art  which  has  as  much  sound 
technical  basis  as  it  has  aesthetic  interest.  Be- 
fore the  days  of  Monet  the  generally  adopted 
method  of  painting  was  to  lay  paint  upon  the 
canvas  with  the  same  tools  as  today  but  by 
means  of  brushings  in  downward  strokes,  mostly 
executed  in  a  slightly  slanting  way  from  the 
upper  right  toward  the  lower  left.  This  practice 
became  almost  an  academic  law.  It  had  to  be 
done  that  way,  and  to  do  anything  else  meant 
an  infraction  of  the  rules  of  the  studio.  That 
rule  was  based  on  the  human  custom  of  using 


AT  SUNRISE 


IM    V!  E  XX 


From  tlie  Oil  Painting  by 
Jonas  Lie,  A.  N.  A. 
Owned  by 

Mrs.  Henry  J.  Ckocker 
San  Francisco.  Cal. 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        125 

the  right  hand  to  work  with  and  on  regard  for 
the  law  of  gravity,  and  also  it  was  for  the  con- 
venience of  the  painter,  that  he  might  see  what 
he  was  doing.  It  is  just  as  arbitrary  as  the 
rule  that  the  light  in  a  picture  must  fall  into  it 
from  the  upper  left-hand  corner,  because  the 
light  falls  that  way  upon  the  canvas  of  the 
painter,  who,  working  with  his  right  hand,  must 
have  his  light  from  the  left  in  order  to  see  what 
he  is  about.  How  arbitrary  this  rule  is,  thought 
of  the  left-handed  painter  will  immediately  point 
out.  To  say  that  this  is  the  way  and  no  other 
way  is  right  could  hardly  lead  to  progress.  The 
impressionistic  painter  threw  these  studio  con- 
ventions to  the  wind.  He  began  to  put  his  paint 
on  very  heavily,  in  order  to  get  body,  and  in  his 
search  for  light  and  expression  of  texture  vio- 
lated all  the  sacred  old  rules.  Working  in  a  high 
key,  large  quantities  of  white  lead  had  to  be 
used.  He  was  at  first  promptly  disqualified  but 
now,  after  some  thirty  years,  we  acknowledge 
that  the  impressionistic  technical  method  is  the 
most  important  artistic  gift  of  the  last  century. 
The  greatest  change  yet  to  come,  however, 
arrived  with  the  Neo-Impressionistic  painter  at 
a  time  when  the  public  had  scarcely  recuperated 


126    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

from  the  first  shocks  of  impressionistic  painting. 
None  the  less  our  modern  exhibitions  owe  much 
of  their  appeal  to  the  very  general  use  of  this 
latest  method,  although  in  its  application  often 
much  disguised.  The  old  method  of  painting  was 
one  of  unbroken  surface,  though  an  undertone 
was  often  permitted  to  make  itself  felt  through- 
out the  canvas.  This  method  of  employing  an 
undertone  is  still  in  vogue,  and  probably  always 
will  be,  since  it  is  the  foundation  of  individual 
expression,  through  the  great  varieties  of  tone 
possible,  and  also  by  reason  of  the  technical 
durability  it  gives  to  a  picture.  It  is  interesting 
to  look  at  pictures  and  see  what  the  undertone 
used  is.  The  French  call  it  "frotte,"  or  a  rub-in 
of  some  color,  generally  warm,  very  thinly  ap- 
plied, upon  which,  while  it  is  still  wet,  the  final 
color  is  put.  To  start  and  finish  a  canvas  painted 
into  the  frotte  has  always  been  considered  a 
technical  accomplishment  of  the  first  order, 
only  the  elect  can  achieve  it,  and  the  paintings 
produced  that  way  are  few  and  far  between,  but 
they  unquestionably  include  many  of  the  great- 
est paintings  of  the  world.  A  little  canvas  of  a 
Dutch  girl  by  a  Munich  man,  Max  Thedy, 
shown  at  the  Carnegie  Institute  and  elsewhere 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        127 

was  the  admiration  of  the  profession  for  its 
unique  qualities  of  painting.  Into  a  brown,  sym- 
pathetic undertone,  a  few  lighter  and  darker 
tones  had  been  set,  with  surety  of  touch  and 
keenness  of  perception.  There  was  really  little 
effort  about  it,  on  close  examination,  but  every- 
thing was  there,  wonderfully  suggested  in  the 
picture's  clear  restrictions  to  a  few  simple  facts. 
Most  of  Duveneck's  canvases  have  that  same 
directness  and  simplicity.  It  is  the  result  of 
putting  the  final  painting  immediately  and 
broadly  into  a  wet  and  sympathetic  technically 
warm  under-painting.  Duveneck's  "Whistling 
Boy,"  among  others,  is  a  good  example  of  this 
method,  though  all  of  his  work  is  easily  recog- 
nizable by  the  same  quality.  Even  in  landscape, 
some  of  the  very  greatest  paintings  are  interest- 
ing for  the  same  manner,  as  Inness'  "Coming 
Storm"  in  the  Buffalo  Fine  Arts  Academy  must 
easily  prove  even  to  a  laymen.  Such  directness, 
such  swiftness  and  energetic  method,  is  enjoy- 
able in  the  extreme.  In  spite  of  its  apparent 
completeness,  this  was  perhaps  the  work  of  forty 
minutes,  and  technically,  to  the  initiated,  it 
looks  the  part.  That  he  afterwards  put  in  that 
dry  tree  and  artificial  foreground,  including  the 


128    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

stump,  was  more  a  concession  to  an  old-time 
formula  than  anything  else.  To  carry  that  won- 
derful green  middle  distance  through  the  entire 
length  of  the  picture  would  have  been  too  much 
to  expect  of  a  man  who,  after  all,  was  uncon- 
sciously working  in  the  Barbizon  tradition,  in 
spite  of  the  very  daring  courage  he  possessed. 
This  indirect  method  of  painting  a  picture  first 
in  a  neutral  color  in  different  values,  or  express- 
ing it  in  light  and  dark  irrespective  of  the  actual 
color,  had  many  advantages  and  many  draw- 
backs. But  the  best  things  produced  in  this 
method  are  as  fine  as  any  other  methods,  past 
or  present.  One  should,  however,  discriminate 
between  the  spontaneously  painted  picture  when 
under  and  over-painting  were  done  in  one  sit- 
ting— where  everything  was  staked  upon  one 
card — and  the  other  type,  when  the  frotte  was 
painted  at  one  time,  allowed  to  dry,  and  fin- 
ished some  other  time.  Our  own  William  Keith 
was  a  past  master  of  the  first  method,  and  some 
of  his  best  canvases  were  painted  in  a  now-or- 
never  spirit  which  we  seldom  meet  with  in  art. 
It  was  this  technical  swiftness  and  facility  in 
which  Keith  excelled  and  in  which  he  at  times 
even  surpasses  the  most  spontaneous  of  Inness' 


PI.ATK  XXI 


From  tlie  Oil  Fainting  by 
Mai  rice  Braun 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        129 

work.  At  its  best,  this  method  of  apparent  ease 
is  convincing  by  reason  of  its  freedom  from  hesi- 
tation and  fumbling. 

But  the  method  of  warm  under-painting  has 
now  generally  fallen  into  disrepute,  perhaps  as 
being  too  dangerously  connected  with  the  past; 
the  younger  men  of  the  modern  type,  to  judge 
from  their  work,  must  be  suspected  of  looking 
upon  the  older  methods  with  a  mixture  of  sym- 
pathy and  pity.  Perhaps  it  is  not  so  much  the 
method  of  painting  as  it  is  the  lack  of  color — in 
the  modern  sense — which  causes  this  attitude. 
However,  I  do  not  believe  the  world  will  ever 
tire  of  Duveneck,  Chase,  Currier,  Sargent, 
Brush,  and  some  more  recent  arrivals  like 
Troccoli  and  Pushman. 

After  the  thin  and  wet  under-painting  we  have 
the  Impressionist  and  after  this  the  Neo-Im- 
pressionist — whom  I  abruptly  abandoned  in  my 
discussion — who  wants  to  go  him  one  better. 
The  light  palette,  gay  with  color,  is  not  enough 
for  him.  He  wants  the  utmost  in  brilliancy  and 
sparkle.  Here,  fortunately,  science  came  to  the 
rescue.  Having  become  interested  in  the  light 
problem  of  the  Plein-airist,  or  painter  who 
paints  in  the  open  air,  the  scientist  pointed  out 


ijo    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOLPE 

to  him,  on  the  basis  of  an  optical  discovery,  that 
small  quantities  of  different  colors  put  alongside 
each  other  would  at  a  distance  appear  like  the 
direct  mixture  of  two  on  the  palette;  take  pri- 
mary colors,  red,  yellow,  and  blue,  selected  in 
pairs,  and  juxtaposition  of  the  proper  two  would 
make  orange,  green,  or  violet,  and  so  on  with 
the  secondary  colors  and  tertiary  colors.  That 
advice  started  a  furious  technical  activity  which 
at  first  shocked  the  public  worse  than  anything 
had  ever  done  before.  These  dotted  or  stippled 
pictures  upset  their  fondest  convictions,  beside 
forcing  the  necessity  upon  the  people  of  learning 
to  see  all  over  again.  The  close  examination  of 
pictures  became  a  joy  of  the  past,  and  squinting 
had  to  be  cultivated  to  get  any  satisfactory  sen- 
sation. However,  we  must  admit  that  Neo-Im- 
pressionism  is  still  with  us  and  that  we  like  it — 
some  of  it  we  like  immensely.  Metcalf's  "Trem- 
bling Leaves"  is  as  popular  a  painting  as  any 
and  the  Frenchman  Le  Sidaner's  night  pictures 
awaken  poetic  sentiments  in  many.  Robert 
Spencer's  charming  portraits  and  even  those  de- 
lightful quarries  of  our  very  gifted  Daniel  Garber 
show  the  symptoms  of  Neo-Impressionistic  in- 
fluences. Our  modern  art  is  absolutely  dominated 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        iji 

by  it,  and  since  our  art  is  so  largely  the  art  of  out- 
doors, the  art  of  the  landscape  painter,  we  recog- 
nize its  influence  everywhere.  No  matter  what 
the  particular  method  of  the  painter  has  been, 
in  one  regard  painters  have  always  been  of  the 
same  opinion,  and  this  is  in  the  desire  to  use  what- 
ever may  be  their  personal  methods  to  express 
themselves  skillfully  and  with  grace  and  charm. 
We  find  that  endeavor  always,  no  matter  how  dif- 
ferent the  technique.  A  German  philosopher 
has  justly  said  that  as  Kunst — art — is  derived 
from  "Konnen" — to  be  able — a  great  deal  that  is 
paraded  as  art  is  not  worthy  of  that  designation, 
since  little  or  no  "Konnen"  is  in  evidence.  The 
whole  question  of  Cubism  and  Futurism  be- 
comes less  a  problem  if  looked  upon  in  that 
light,  since  "von  Konnen  da  ist  keineSpur" — 
of  real  knowledge  there  is  no  trace. 

The  question  of  technical  quality  is  naturally 
governed  by  the  effect  desired,  and  any  art 
exhibition  will  disclose  as  many  methods  as 
there  are  artists.  One  of  the  most  acutely  inter- 
esting and  competent  of  present-day  painters  in 
a  technical  sense  is  our  own  Redfield.  There  is 
not  much  romantic  appeal  in  his  work,  but  in  its 
straightforward  method  of  painting  it  is  almost 


ij2    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

in  a  class  by  itself.  He  presents  a  most  interest- 
ing phenomenon  of  a  most  heavily  painted  pic- 
ture which  invites  very  close  inspection  and 
which  reveals  a  most  fascinating  technical  qual- 
ity. One's  admiration  grows  for  the  painter  of 
these  suggestive  fragments  of  nature,  largely 
because  the  plastic  handling  of  the  paint  seems 
most  carefully  considered  in  each  and  every 
stroke,  with  a  full  feeling  of  responsibility  that 
each  stroke  must  tell,  not  only  constructively, 
but  by  enlivening  the  surface  of  the  painting,  by 
catching  light  and  throwing  shadows.  Redfield's 
art  is  particularly  noteworthy  amidst  that  of 
many  modern  Americans  because  of  its  live 
quality  of  paint.  Speaking  of  the  living  quality 
of  paint,  one  is  reminded  of  the  dynamic  work 
of  a  young  Russian,  Nicholas  Fechin,  who  has 
fascinated  many  by  the  technical  extravagance 
and  animation  of  his  superbly  original  work. 
One  feels  that  here  paint  has  been  made  to  do 
things  one  too  seldom  sees  on  a  canvas.  The 
suppressed  emotionalism  of  Whistler's  paintings 
seems  almost  dead  alongside  of  a  Redfield  or 
Fechin,  but  it  has  a  quality  of  its  own  which  is 
inimitable — and  vexatious,  as  any  Whistler  nat- 
urally would  be.   The  "Lady  by  the  Shore"  by 


AT  THE  HIPPODROME 


PI. ATI-.  Wll 


From  (he  Oil  Painting  by 

(,'IFFORD  BEAL,    N.  A. 

Owned  by 

Martin  Ryerson,  Esq.,  Chicago,  III. 


THE  TECHNICAL  DEVELOPMENT        i33 

Leo  -Putz,  shown  on  many  occasions  in  this 
country,  discloses  another  method  of  putting  on 
paint  which,  while  it  is  decidedly  mosaic,  is 
nevertheless  very  absorbing.  After  some  thought 
about  this  technical  procedure,  I  cannot  help 
but  feel  that  anybody  must  quickly  come  to  the 
conclusion  that  it  is  just  along  these  lines  that 
painting  really  gains  in  interest.  The  vast  num- 
bers of  pictures  painted  in  an  abstract,  meaning- 
less style  will  certainly  arouse  no  interest.  It  is 
here  that  a  conception  of  style  formulates  itself 
even  in  the  mind  of  the  layman,  who  must  read 
ily  see  that  the  handwriting  of  a  painter,  so  to 
speak,  is  an  inalienable  asset  of  which  he  cannot 
be  deprived.  On  the  other  hand,  the  catchy 
legerdemain  performances  of  certain  painters 
are  often  as  quick  in  captivating  one's  eye  as 
they  are  in  boring  one's  intellect.  They  are  often 
merely  skill  and  nothing  more.  But  mere  skill 
is  hardly  enough,  though  it  should  be  the  sup- 
port of  the  artist  to  facilitate  the  transmission  of 
his  idea  upon  the  canvas.  Much  of  the  modern 
slovenliness  of  painting  is  due  to  a  lack  of  under- 
standing of  technical  means.  The  "alia  prima" 
methods  of  modern  stenographic  painting  often 
profess  to  have  as  an  ideal  the  fluent  and  direct 


i34    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

methods  of  Velasquez,  Franz  Hals,  Hogarth,  and 
Whistler,  without  realizing  that  much  of  the 
wild  dash  of  modern  art  is  nothing  more  than  a 
physical  stunt  expressing  neither  an  idea,  a 
mood,  nor  an  observation.  The  present-day 
leaders  in  the  field  of  portrait  painting,  men  like 
Sargent,  Salomon,  Shannon,  or  Blanche,  never 
allow  one  to  stop  with  an  enjoyment  of  mere 
beauty  of  paint,  but  they  carry  one  on  into  the 
psychological  depths  of  their  sitters.  Style  is 
often  used  to  define  a  certain  difference  in  char- 
acter of  technique,  and  while  the  word  is  not 
applied  to  that  alone,  it  includes  that.  It  is  the 
technique  that  attracts  us  to  certain  painters 
because  it  contains  something  individual;  the 
man's  technical  procedure  differs  from  that  of 
any  other  painter;  it  has  a  personal  quality. 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      135 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL 

IF  we  placed  any  trust  in  the  oft-asserted 
contention  that  what  is  considered  beautiful  and 
elevating  today  was  not  so  regarded  in  days 
gone  by,  and  vice  versa,  we  should  deprive  our- 
selves of  the  most  engaging  pleasure  that  art 
offers,  namely,  its  multiformity  of  expression. 
While  the  choice  of  subject  matter  in  art 
throughout  succeeding  periods  must  justly  seem 
most  vacillating,  it  must  again  be  repeated  that 
the  same  common  abstract  qualities  of  art  have 
endured  through  all  times.  While  the  subject 
matter  in  art  may  naturally  have  changed  from 
one  thing  to  another,  whatever  constitutes  artis- 
tic appeal  in  methods  of  representation  will  be 
found  a  universal  quality  throughout  all  ages. 
This  applies  not  only  to  the  abstract  elements  of 
beauty  in  a  work  of  art,  those  which  are  de- 
pendent upon  line  and  form,  balance,  harmony, 
rhythm,  color,  technique,  and  composition  and 
arrangement,  but  also  to  their  raisons  d'etre. 

The  use  of  different  subjects  in  art,  as  they 
appeal  to  our  intellect,  by  reason  of  their  moral 


ij6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

religious,  political,  and  philosophical  character, 
has  on  the  other  hand  shown  a  great  many 
variations.  To  many  people  only  those  pictures 
are  absorbing  which  depict  the  habits,  morals, 
and  customs  of  bygone  days  and  of  different 
periods.  Undoubtedly  it  is  this  aspect  of  a 
picture  that  particularly  controls  and  fastens 
the  interest  of  the  masses  upon  art,  and  for  that 
reason  it  becomes  of  prime  importance  to  the 
student.  It  will  be  found  that  the  genuineness, 
the  veracity  of  atmosphere  in  a  picture,  is  very 
intimately  connected  with  its  power  of  appeal. 
Since  the  true  artists  of  any  period  convincingly 
and  intentionally  reflected  the  milieu  of  their 
days,  on  the  other  hand  all  historical  pictures 
not  coincidental  in  their  production  with  the 
period  represented  are  annoyingly  uninteresting 
and  affected.  The  pictures  which  at  once  be- 
come engaging  to  the  mind  are  those  which 
spring  from  the  personal  experience  of  the  artist 
— irrespective  of  chronological  affiliation  with 
old  or  modern  technical  schools.  The  fresh  and 
candid  pictorial  document  belonging  to  any 
time  holds  not  the  same  charms,  however,  in  all 
cases.  The  subjects  represented  may  in  their 
appearance  differ  vastly,  but  the  spirit  of  sug- 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      137 

gestive  realism,  of  live  interpretation,  has  ever 
been  the  same  in  the  worth-while  pictures  of  both 
new  and  old.  It  is  customary  with  many  to  value 
paintings    according    to    their    so-called    moral 
power,  as  expressed  by  the  subject — as  if  the 
subject  had  any  part  in  this  question  of  moral 
uplift — as  if  art  could  moralize  in  the  sense  of 
the  direct  moral  verbal  appeal  of  the  preacher. 
The  artistically  good  and  the  bad  religious  pic- 
ture will  prove  the  wrongness  of  this  trite  idea. 
The  loftiness  of  style,  the  rhythmic  charm,  the 
stately  balance  of  a  Bellini  Madonna  stir  our 
instinctive  feelings  of  exaltation  just  as  much 
as  the  expression  of  maternal  pride  and  devotion 
in  her  face.    On  the  other  hand,  a  treatment  of 
the  same  subject  that  is  crude  and  vulgar  in 
form,  color,  etc.,  will  put  one's  mind  into  a  state 
of  depression  in  which  one's  capacity  for  good  is 
impaired.   This  common  confidence  in  the  emo- 
tional and  spiritual  effect  of  a  subject,  inde- 
pendent of  the  abstract  artistic  quality  inherent 
in  the  manner  of  representation,  to  my  mind  is 
not  based  on  any  real  experience,  but  merely  on 
prejudice  and  confusion  of  ideas. 

It  was  purely  an  historical  accident,  I   feel 
certain,  that  the  first  important  pictures  painted 


ij8    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

were  of  a  religious  character.  The  church,  being 
the  moving  spirit  in  every  human  activity,  early 
constituted  itself,  in  its  customary  zeal,  the  first 
real  art  patron,  with  the  result  that  the  earliest 
important  pictures  were  all  of  the  ecclesiastical 
kind.  It  would  be  very  wrong  to  conclude,  just 
because  that  was  the  case,  and  with  regard  for 
age,  that  all  religious  pictures  are  necessarily  of 
a  superior  order.  Since  the  age  of  the  Madonna 
and  Child  is  synonymous  with  that  of  many  of 
the  world's  best  pictures,  the  popular  prejudice 
in  favor  of  these  is  easily  understood.  The 
astonishing  fact  that  the  first  period  of  easel 
painting  has  never  been  equalled  or  surpassed 
in  loftiness  of  style,  imaginative  fancy,  and 
luxurious  technique,  moreover,  very  easily  ex- 
plains the  confusion.  I  certainly  believe  that 
after  the  truth  of  its  appeal  to  sentiment  is 
acknowledged  in  a  picture,  the  technical  method 
of  the  canvas  should  always  be  taken  into  ac- 
count, and  if  they  are  found  to  support  the  in- 
tellectual beauty,  all  is  well.  But  how  rarely  do 
we  observe  any  attempt  at  this  professional 
attitude  among  the  masses!  The  public  at  large 
seems  to  have  a  most  perplexing  time  trying  to 
estimate  comparatively  one  quality  against  the 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL    139 

other.     Every  religious  picture  is  treated  with 
reverence  as  if  in  its  very  nature  it  must  be  good 
art.    That  the  goodness  of  a  picture  may  mani- 
fest itself  in  twofold  ways — in   the  intelligent 
representation  of  the  idea  as  well  as  in  qualities 
of  abstract  beauty — this  alone  can  be  the  foun- 
dation of  artistic  criticism.    To  many  laymen  it 
seldom  occurs  that  a  religious  picture  might  be 
bad.    The  idea  is  generally  regarded  as  prepos- 
terous, no  matter  how  distressingly  composed, 
no  matter  how  dry  in  paint,  the  picture  of  the 
Madonna  and  Child  may  appear  to  be.     The 
conventional  idea  of  respect  for  everything  reli- 
gious has  removed  the  religious  picture  almost 
entirely  from  the  sphere  of  criticism.    What  is 
true  in  a  special  way  of  the  religious  picture  is 
even  more  true  of  the  so-called  Old  Master  gen- 
erally.   The  term  Old  Master  to  many  means 
only  one  thing,  namely,  something  supremely 
good  and  exceedingly  valuable.  Any  old  canvas 
with  flyspecks  on  it  and  showing  in  every  con- 
ceivable way  the  signs  of  old  age  is  termed  an 
Old  Master.    That  it  might  be  the  work  of  an 
old  time  apprentice  or  journeyman  painter  sel- 
dom occurs  to  anybody.    My  many  visits  to  re- 
mote places  to  inspect  so-called  Old  Masters  of 


140    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

supposedly  enormous  value  have  never  resulted 
in  the  discovery  of  a  single  picture  which  would 
justify  its  being  taken  from  its  place  in  the  store- 
room. People  are  perfectly  hysterical  about  the 
discovery  of  Old  Masters.  As  if  there  were 
really  many  yet  to  be  discovered?  Most  paint- 
ings worth  any  attention  are  duly  known  and 
recognized.  But  the  merry  chase  goes  on,  like 
the  proverbial  hunt  for  buried  treasure  on  one 
of  the  many  palm-studded  islands  of  the  Pacific. 
The  religious  picture  remains  a  great  favorite 
with  the  public  in  this  regard,  and  the  worse  it 
is  in  color  and  drawing,  the  more  likely  it  is  to 
be  pronounced  a  masterpiece.  With  the  modern 
disregard  for  execution  and  form,  the  blame  is 
partly  to  be  laid  at  the  door  of  certain  schools 
of  modern  art.  The  great  pictures  of  the  great 
masters  of  the  Renaissance  were  mostly  religious 
though  with  the  influence  of  the  church  lessen- 
ing and  the  patronage  by  a  rich  aristocracy 
waxing,  naturally  the  character  of  pictures 
changed  and  Saints  or  Madonna  and  Child 
ceased  to  be  the  sole  motives.  However,  the 
Christ  Child  and  its  Mother,  the  glorification 
of  the  joy  and  tragedy  of  motherhood,  has  occu- 
pied painters  of  all  time,  even  to  our  own  times 


MONTEREY  BAY 


PLATE  XXIII 


From  the  oil  Painting  by 
Bru<  e  Nelson 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      141 

when  men  like  Melchers,  Brush,  Thayer,  and 
Paxton  have  treated  it  with  great  sympathy 
and  a  new  meaning.  During  the  Seventeenth 
Century,  the  great  period  of  painting  in  Spain, 
religious  pictures  were  continued  in  the  work  of 
Murillo,  but  the  portrait  of  the  rich  citizen  or 
the  nobleman  and  the  battle  picture  began  to 
come  to  the  fore.  Since,  as  already  remarked, 
any  art  period  reflects  the  political,  religious, 
and  economic  history  of  its  time,  art  has  often 
supplied  a  truthful  background  invaluable  for 
the  historian.  Thus  to  the  serious  student  art 
becomes  doubly  interesting,  while  the  person 
merely  looking  for  passing  pleasures  in  art  does 
away  with  period  pictures,  as  merely  amusing, 
forgetting  how  we  ourselves  might  appear  if 
pictorially  represented  to  some  future  gallery 
stroller  a  hundred  years  hence.  As  to  people 
ridiculously  dressed,  the  last  twenty  years  here 
and  abroad  surely  have  been  as  sensational  as 
anything  we  might  meet  in  the  early  Spanish, 
French,  or  Dutch  pictures.  The  Meninas  by 
Velasquez,  with  their  odd  and  cumbersome 
hoop-skirts,  are  not  half  so  amusing  as  the 
glued-on  hats  and  curls  of  the  early  Twentieth 
Century  damsel. 


142    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

The  northern  countries  ultimately  discarded 
religious  subjects  entirely  and  went  into  an 
artistic  exploitation,  with  a  realism  sometimes 
very  frank,  of  subject  matter  which  often  shocks 
the  Puritan.  We  hear  constantly  that  in  spite 
of  the  realistic  depiction  of  every-day  occur- 
rences in  the  art  of  the  Seventeenth  Century 
Dutch,  their  art  was  great  and  on  a  par  with 
the  best  of  the  world.  These  Dutch  painters — 
Rembrandt,  Terborch,  Ver  Mehr  van  Delft, 
Metsu,  Brouwer,  Teniers,  Jan  Steen — they  knew 
how  to  impart  to  their  work  a  charm  of  abstract 
beauty,  a  feeling  of  conviction  which  will  make 
any  painting  attractive.  Pictures  like  theirs, 
having  a  quality  of  beauty  in  line  and  form  and 
color,  do  not  suffer  by  reason  of  subject,  pro- 
viding it  is  not  directly  debasing.  The  Dutch 
painters  certainly  proved  this  very  forcibly. 
The  Dutch  were  also  the  first  to  introduce  still- 
life  as  an  independent  subject  of  very  ambitious 
proportions.  Jan  Weenix,  with  his  photographic 
still-lifes  reflecting  in  the  highlights  of  the  pol- 
ished metal  the  whole  interior  of  the  studio,  are 
still  looked  at  in  the  museums  of  Holland  and 
Germany  with  amazement  and  boundless  joy. 
They  are  said  to  have  been  painted  under  a 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      143 

microscope  and  they  certainly  give  one  that 
impression.  They  are  great  demonstrations  of 
the  small  value  of  the  time  of  their  painters,  and 
also  of  their  lack  of  understanding  of  the  limita- 
tions of  painting.  While  perfect  in  drawing, 
they  are  very  unsatisfactory  in  texture,  and 
every  article  in  them  looks  almost  as  if  made 
from  glass.  This  glassy,  transparent  quality  is 
more  helpful  in  the  representation  of  glassy 
things  like  glass  itself,  or  polished  surfaces  like 
marble,  copper  bowls,  or  hand-polished  fruit. 
But  when  it  comes  to  pieces  of  fabric,  carpets, 
and  velvet  particularly,  the  whole  thing  be- 
comes inconsistent.  This  school  of  the  Dutch 
still-life  painters  still  has  its  followers,  though 
our  modern  painters  certainly  show  more  knowl- 
edge in  the  handling  of  textures.  Hondecoter 
was  the  really  wonderful  man  in  that  field,  and 
his  barnyard  pictures  will  always  remain  most 
interesting  for  beautiful  design,  bold  handling, 
fine  characterization,  and  for  the  curiously  hu- 
man fowl.  The  veracious  art  of  the  sturdy 
Dutch  finds  its  antithesis  in  the  ultra-refined  art 
of  the  English  portrait  painter,  such  as  Gains- 
borough, Reynolds,  Romney,  Hoppner,  and 
others.     While    the    Dutch    painters    painted 


144    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

invariably  the  true  physical  aspects  of  things,  the 
English  strove  for  an  idealized  spiritual  repre- 
sentation of  their  aristocracy  and  upper  classes. 
We  admire  the  stately  dignity  of  the  English 
school,  but  it  assuredly  does  not  give  us  much 
of  an  insight  into  the  life  of  the  English  people. 
Hogarth  practically  stands  out  alone  as  the 
cool  observer,  the  biting  critic,  the  sometimes 
snarly  cynic,  among  the  painters  of  England, 
showing  in  bold  ruthlessness  the  vices,  corrupt 
politics,  and  decadent  home  life  of  some  of  his 
contemporaries.  Hogarth's  position  as  an  in- 
dividualistic analyzer  of  his  time  foreshadows 
the  even  more  personal  outlook  and  self-realiza- 
tion expressed  in  modern  art.  In  the  long  run, 
Hogarth  as  a  figure  will  retain  the  admiration  of 
the  world,  not  so  much  for  the  bold  manner  of 
his  painting  as  for  his  broad  and  illuminating 
conception  of  his  professional  responsibilities. 
Art  has  always  been  in  England,  more  than  any- 
where else,  the  interest  of  the  rich,  though  the 
true  art  of  the  people,  curiously  enough,  was 
advocated  first  by  William  Morris,  in  the  seven- 
ties, when  he  laid  the  foundation,  by  his  work, 
his  writings,  and  his  preachings,  of  what  we 
now  enjoy  as  the  new  school,  particularly  in 


IN  THE  VALLEY 


PI.ATK  XXIV 


From  the  Oil  Painting  bv 

Joseph  T.  Pearson,  Jr. 

Owned  by  the 

University  Cub.  Philadelphia.  Pa. 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      145 

applied  art.  To  point  at  the  constant  change 
in  aesthetic  ideals  as  a  proof  that  art  is  simply 
a  matter  of  taste  is  an  argument  much  used  by 
the  public.  But  to  choose  a  subject  and  inter- 
pret it  in  the  right  environment  is  not  always  an 
easy  task.  There  is  hardly  a  greater  step  than 
from  the  Dutch  painter  to  the  English  portrait 
painter,  although  we  know  that  the  two  are  in- 
timately connected  by  the  art  of  Van  Dyck, 
who  laid  the  foundation  for  the  great  English 
Eighteenth  Century  school,  and  in  his  more 
polished  and  restrained  art  bridged  over  from 
the  sensuous  realism  of  Rubens  to  the  refined 
portraits  of  Gainsborough  and  Reynolds. 

It  is  most  puzzling  that  the  ideal  of  physical 
beauty  painted  by  the  Dutch  is  scarcely  sym- 
pathetic to  anybody  excepting  the  Dutch  peo- 
ple. Again,  their  independence  in  art,  resisting 
the  southern  tradition  in  aesthetics  as  well  as 
any  attempt  from  that  side  to  interfere  with 
their  political  existence,  culminated  in  a  spirit 
of  freedom  that  is  well-nigh  amazing.  They 
could  neither  be  seduced  by  the  exotic  nor 
forced  by  arms  to  be  anybody  but  themselves. 
The  aesthetic  ideal  of  the  Dutch  was  home- 
made.    However,    the   shock   is   great   to   the 


146    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

average  American  travelling  abroad  for  the  first 
time,  when  he  sees  the  many  florid  pictures  by 
Rubens  or  Jordaens  in  England,  France,  Hol- 
land, and  Germany.  They  are  positively  pro- 
voking to  him  at  first,  though  eventually  he 
learns  to  admire  their  skill  and  technique,  their 
joyous  expression,  and  their  big,  decorative 
style.  The  Dutch  are  absolutely  by  themselves 
in  the  outspoken  realism  of  their  art.  It  is  sim- 
ply the  reflection  of  the  life  of  these  people, 
whose  every  manner  and  whose  language  were 
and  still  are  free  from  prudishness  and  false 
modesty.  Van  Dyck  carries  over  into  his 
adopted  country  all  the  technical  brilliancy  of 
his  great  teacher,  and  in  the  studies  of  Gains- 
borough, Reynolds,  Hoppner,  and  the  others 
this  grows  into  the  stately  and  untempera- 
mental  dignity  of  a  calm  and  more  stoic  race. 
To  the  English,  who  had  no  understanding  of  the 
often  peculiar  pleasantries  of  Dutch  country 
life,  the  turning  up  of  the  seamy  side  of  life,  as 
the  Dutch  sometimes  did,  appealed  even  less. 
The  difference  may  seem  radical  between  the 
highest  expression  of  the  Dutch  and  of  the  Eng- 
lish, but  not  any  more  so  than  between  the  two 
of  them  and  the  Watteaus,  Fragonards,  and 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      147 

Bouchers  of  the  Eighteenth  Century  French. 
While  art  in  England  portrayed  idealistically 
many  people  of  high  position  and  was  always 
careful  to  leave  a  good  moral  impression  for  the 
future  historian,  the  French  painter  of  the 
Eighteenth  Century  cared  naught  for  the  deluge 
to  come  after  him.  These  French  painters 
snapped  their  fingers  in  the  face  of  future  his- 
torians, and  in  representations  of  lax  morals 
surpassed  even  the  coarse  naturalism  of  the 
Dutch.  The  many  frank  scenes  of  bibulous 
peasantry  making  love  to  their  rotund  women 
that  we  see  in  Adrian  Brouwer,  Jan  Steen, 
Teniers,  and  others,  are  devoid  of  the  graceful, 
conventional  mannerisms  the  gallant  French- 
man displays  in  the  art  of  the  fastidious  painters 
of  the  periods  of  Louis  XV.  and  XVI.  The 
Dutch  painter  dwells  upon  the  moral  looseness 
of  his  people  by  using  as  models  the  very  same 
people  in  their  everyday  surroundings,  while  the 
Frenchman  puts  wings  on  them,  so  to  speak, 
and  transfers  them  into  Arcadia.  It  is  simply 
another  phase  of  the  change  of  the  aesthetic 
ideal,  an  ideal  that  will  never  seem  the  same, 
and  will  always  find  its  expression  in  some  phase 
of  the  political,  social,  and  moral  background 


148    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

of  a  people.  So  long  as  the  art  expression  of  a 
people  is  in  harmony  with  some  characteristic 
phase  of  their  life,  there  will  never  be  anything 
wrong  with  it.  It  is  only  when  the  art  of  one 
country  is  bodily  transplanted  into  foreign  na- 
tion that  bad  will  result.  The  craving  for  the 
exotic  and  the  affectation  of  an  ideal  based  on 
alien  backgrounds  has  diverted  the  attention  of 
many  good  painters  from  the  fields  of  inspira- 
tion in  their  immediate  surroundings.  The 
cloudy  mirroring  of  their  own  civilization  was 
the  inevitable  result  of  their  short-sightedness 
and  lack  of  real  interest  in  their  work. 

We  see  the  half-digested  art  of  the  Paris  atel- 
ier in  the  modern  Filipino  paraded  as  a  so- 
called  national  art  of  that  country.  The  effect 
is  grotesque,  to  say  the  least.  The  many  efforts 
of  well-prepared  modern  painters  to  revive  in 
their  art  the  civilization  of  bygone  days  is  always 
singularly  pathetic.  The  classicising  and  fragile 
art  of  an  Alma  Tadema  is  hardly  a  contribution 
to  the  art  of  the  present  age,  in  spite  of  its  popu- 
larity. That  the  great  periods  had  no  naturalis- 
tic painters,  in  the  modern  sense,  is  doubtless 
regrettable,  but  we  get  all  we  ever  wish  to  know 
about   their   lives,   manners,   and    contribution 


THK  STORM 


PLATE  XXV 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Hermann  Dudley  Murphy 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      149 

through  other  channels,  and  the  pleasant  plati- 
tudes of  such  a  painter  as  Alma  Tadema,  whose 
every  effort  is  uninteresting  by  reason  of  a  lack 
of  wholesome  imagination,  will  not  tell  us  any 
more  than  is  already  known.  The  beginning  of 
decay  in  any  art  has  always  been  foreshadowed 
by  the  borrowing  of  the  methods  and  subjects 
of  bygone  periods  and  of  other  peoples,  and  art 
never  was  more  interesting  and  wholesome  than 
when  it  was  concerned  exclusively  with  the  re- 
stricted atmosphere  of  a  natural  or  racial  unit. 
Greece,  the  Renaissance,  the  Gothic  period,  the 
art  of  the  modern  French,  of  Sweden,  Norway, 
and  Finland,  and  even  the  art  of  America  will 
illustrate  this  point.  The  great  ideal  art  of  any 
people  has  come  out  of  the  logical  development 
of  their  particular  civilization,  and  the  reac- 
tionary methods  of  the  Nineteenth  Century 
painters  had  to  lead  inevitably  to  the  revolt, 
the  full  importance  of  which  we  are  made  to  feel 
right  now.  What  really  constitutes  the  aesthetic 
ideal  in  pictures  nowadays  is  hard  to  say.  There 
is  one  part  of  the  profession  who  think  any  old 
established  way  is  good  enough  for  them.  They 
compare  themselves  with  any  older  generation 
of  painters  of  any  period.    They  are  naturally 


/So    POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

opposed  to  anything  which  might  force  them  to 
unlearn  old  ideas  and  study  new  ways.  To  this 
class  belong  all  of  the  successful  older  present  day 
academic  painters.  The  other  is  the  modern 
man  generally,  the  younger  member  of  the  pro- 
fession, who  for  many  reasons,  all  of  which  are 
very  human  and  interesting,  is  generally  op- 
posed to  anything  the  older  ones  do.  Sometimes 
he  is  a  mere  faker,  realizing  that  the  easiest  way 
to  publicity  and  notoriety  is  to  be  different,  and 
he  finds  that  very  easy.  To  be  contrary  has  been 
at  all  times  the  attribute  of  the  seeker  of  the 
limelight.  He  has  never  known  the  rudiments 
of  the  old  school.  Hard  work  is  not  an  experience 
of  his  life,  and  everything  he  does  he  values  in 
proportion  to  the  ease  with  which  it  can  be 
accomplished.  He  often  belongs  to  a  mutual 
admiration  society,  frequently  large,  and  the 
general  attitude  of  the  public  toward  all  societies 
of  that  type — the  same  attitude  it  takes  toward 
quarantined  people — permits  such  coteries  to 
flourish  unmolested  until  they  die  from  persis- 
tent anaemia.  Works  by  these  men  go  some- 
times into  respectable  exhibitions,  and  certain 
people  who  yearn  for  new  sensations  hypnotize 
themselves  into  the  belief  that  they  are  witness- 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      151 

ing  the  beginnings  of  a  new  art.  This  sort  of  art 
enthusiasm  is  not  uncommon,  and  flourishes 
anywhere.  However,  not  all  innovators  are  of 
this  kidney.  The  really  earnest  ones  have  grad- 
uated from  the  conventional  school,  sometimes 
with  conspicuous  honors.  They  have  become 
dissatisfied  with  the  monotony  of  repeated  per- 
formances, and  led  by  perfectly  honest  motives, 
they  begin  to  experiment,  invariably  with  no 
idea  of  reward  of  any  kind.  Often  they  make 
great  sacrifices  in  their  search  for  a  new  expres- 
sion of  their  ideas,  go  into  seclusion  as  a  proof 
of  their  seriousness — and  work!  Just  now  we 
are  confronted  with  the  results  of  such  experi- 
mental art,  and  the  perplexities  of  the  public 
have  grown  almost  unbearable.  Although  a  cer- 
tain consternation  reigns,  with  remarkable 
unanimity  the  public  insists  upon  being  amused 
by  these  latest  efforts.  Despite  solemn  warnings 
from  the  historically  inclined  that  similar  things 
have  happened  before,  and  that  contempt  has 
turned  into  approval,  this  time  no  such  warning 
has  any  effect.  The  typical  examples  of  great 
innovators  are  pointed  out  over  and  over  again 
— Constable's  pathetic  experience,  the  Barbizon 
men    in    general,    and    particularly    the    great 


152    PAINTERS ',  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

French  Impressionists  of  the  seventies,  Monet, 
Manet,  Renoir,  Pissarro,  and  others.  But  to  no 
avail;  the  public  refuses  to  take  these  latest 
innovators  seriously.  The  chief  cause  for  the 
refusal  lies  in  a  certain  lack  of  similarity  of  con- 
ditions. While  on  former  occasions  only  things 
physically  visible  were  involved,  our  new  art 
professes  to  have  invaded  the  realm  of  the 
psychic — that  is  to  say,  claims  that  painting  has 
rather  suddenly  ceased  to  be  an  objective  ex- 
pression and  has  turned  to  give  visual  form  to 
subjective  motives  of  the  artist,  who,  owing  to 
a  change  of  circumstances  to  be  pointed  out  in 
a  chapter  hereinafter  on  "Art  Patronage,"  no 
longer  finds  it  either  necessary  or  useful  to  paint 
objects  for  their  own  sake  and  so  to  have  his 
subjective  feelings  subordinated.  We  have  had 
always  the  "art  of  art's  sake"  painter,  but  the 
rabid  negation  of  the  traditional  has  never 
assumed  such  violent  form  as  in  certain  in- 
stances today.  It  has  become  very  largely  a 
direct  contest  between  the  objective  painter  of 
the  past  and  the  subjective  individualist  who 
seems  to  sense  possibilities  in  the  part  of  paint- 
ing heretofore  never  regarded  as  properly  its 
field. 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      153 

Here,  immediately,  the  great  question  of  the 
limitation  of  pictorial  expression  is  brought  up, 
and  there,  to  my  mind,  lies  the  whole  trouble. 
No  sensible  person  will  deny  the  right  of  experi- 
mentation to  any  person  technically  gifted,  and 
we  are  usually  bound  to  respect  any  honest  ex- 
periment, but  whether  we  should  ipso  facto  take 
as  final  and  conclusive  a  new  outlook  heretofore 
never  connected  with  the  aims  of  painting,  as 
to  this,  I  think  caution,  if  not  suspicion,  is  surely 
warranted.  What  is  generally  designated  as 
Cubism  is  of  course  no  novelty  to  any  painter 
with  academic  training.  The  novelty  merely 
consists  in  presenting  something  as  a  finished 
thing  which  was  formerly  looked  upon  as  a  basic 
constructive  start.  From  Egyptian  and  Assyrian 
days  to  the  present  we  find  the  cubistic  principle 
of  drawing  and  also  of  painting.  It  is  a  perfectly 
sound  principle,  a  nursery  idea  which  no  painter 
can  afford  to  neglect.  To  see  and  represent 
things  geometrically  in  planes  is  the  most 
primitive  method  of  reproduction,  and  the  most 
economical  at  the  same  time.  Japanese  wood- 
carvings  of  older  periods  and  modern  wood  toys 
are  as  typical  as  the  paintings  which  attempt 
representation  in  the  same  fashion.   The  cubistic 


154    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

idea  is  absolutely  sound,  and  nothing  but  a 
most  healthy  expression  of  the  objections  of 
certain  men  in  the  profession  against  insipid  and 
loose  construction  of  pictures.  Cubism  is  con- 
structively inherent  in  any  good  painting, 
whether  of  old  or  new  schools.  To  make  it  the 
single  feature  of  a  picture  denuded  of  any  other 
quality  is  of  course  objectionable  to  any  person 
trained  in  the  belief  that  the  constructive  fea- 
tures of  a  picture  must  be  modified  by  decorative 
aspects.  A  building  left  in  the  raw,  so  to  speak, 
merely  in  steel  construction,  is  artistic  some- 
times if  the  engineer  happened  to  feel  his  ma- 
terial, as  does  an  artist.  Eventually  it  will  be 
clothed  by  the  varied  and  modified  forms  of  the 
architect.  Sometimes  steel  alone  is  not  at 
all  uninteresting,  and  occasionally  this  fact  is 
acknowledged  by  doing  the  unconventional 
thing  and  not  covering  up  the  engineer's  work 
with  traditional  architectural  forms.  The  artis- 
tic idea  will  always  assert  itself  unless  art  ceases 
to  exist,  and  the  fact  that  it  has  been  suppressed 
so  vigorously  by  certain  Cubists  proves  merely 
their  resentment  against  the  meaningless  repe- 
tition of  trivial  things,  particularly  of  the 
pretty-pretty  or  sickly  sweet  variety.     Asso- 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      155 

dated  with  the  constructive  Cubism  of  many 
modern  artists  is  a  demand  for  primitiveness  in 
color  as  well  as  in  form.  It  is  the  logical  step  in 
eliminating  all  mild  and  mushy  middle  tones  for 
the  modelling  of  these  figures,  and  is  absolutely 
consistent  with  the  underlying  idea  of  sim- 
plicity. Some  of  the  things  which  have  been 
produced  in  that  vein  are  wonders  of  action  and 
of  pattern.  The  Cubists  do  refuse  to  use  the 
conventional  principles  of  rhythm,  which  play 
a  very  important  part  in  academic  work.  The 
best  of  the  Cubist  work,  Cezanne's,  Picabia's,  and 
Picasso's,  certainly  is  bound  to  find  high  place  in 
the  history  of  art,  and  it  is  already  evident  that 
the  effect  of  the  movement  has  been  most  bene- 
ficial to  art.  Let  us  imagine,  for  a  moment,  what 
might  have  happened  if  Cubism  had  not  been 
revived  for  us  at  this  time  in  such  vigorous  lan- 
guage. The  complacent  and  gouty  self-satisfac- 
tion of  the  great  masses  of  painters  would  by 
this  time  have  arrived  at  a  point  where  it  could 
only  be  called  sickening.  The  vigorous  spirit  of 
the  Cubists  and  their  contagious  method  of 
plastic  thinking  have  given  new  impetus  to  art. 
The  best  of  their  art  is  decidedly  decorative, 
reverting  to  the  old  original  idea  of  the  true 


IS6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

function  of  painting,  and  that  fact  alone  should 
be  greeted  with  approval. 

I  wish  I  were  equally  certain  in  my  feelings 
about  the  Futurist,  whose  procrastinating  title 
savors  of  conceit.  He  may  be  innocent  of  choos- 
ing it,  but  the  title  has  stuck,  and  increased  one's 
bias.  The  Futurist,  by  reason  of  this,  will 
always  lay  claim  to  be  the  latest.  I  confess  he  is 
somewhat  obscure  to  me,  not  so  much  in  his 
aims  as  in  his  attainments.  I  respect  his  at- 
tempts, but  often  have  no  understanding  of  the 
result.  I  believe  he  is  as  serious  as  his  half- 
brother  the  Cubist.  Personally,  I  doubt  whether 
psychic  emotion  can  be  represented  by  pictorial 
formulae.  To  me,  the  Diisseldorf  painter  with 
his  literary  subjects  was  just  as  wrong  as  the 
Futurist  with  his  effects  which  might  be  more 
successfully  approached  by  literature  or  music. 
But  it  remains  to  be  seen,  and  we  can  well  afford 
to  wait,  since  the  great  majority  of  painters  have 
decided  to  remain  within  the  limitations  of  the 
older  schools.  The  public  remains  perplexed  and 
makes  no  effort  to  hide  its  feelings  of  disap- 
proval. Why  worry  over  it?  Those  who  saw  a 
new  world  open  up  to  them  when  the  Futurists 
or  Post-Impressionists  generally  held  their  first 


PORTRAIT  OK   ELMER   S.    HADER 


PLATKXW  I 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 

1  .   Si  BNI   I  R  MACKV 


CHANGES  IN  THE  AESTHETIC  IDEAL      157 

studio  teas,  had  no  doubt  honest  intentions  in 
giving  the  larger  public  a  chance  for  observation 
in  public  exhibitions.  It  would  have  been  far 
better  if  all  of  those  experimental  efforts  had 
remained  with  their  sires.  But  it  was  the  great 
nation  above  all  others  willing  to  be  used  as  an 
experimental  rabbit  which  opened  its  doors  to 
the  new  school  in  a  large  exhibition  in  New  York 
in  1913.  When  one  considers  that  not  one  in 
fifty  people  in  this  country  of  ours  can  appre- 
ciate a  conventionally  painted  picture,  this  ex- 
hibition can  only  be  called  a  futile  though  a  well- 
meant  effort.  Our  method  of  bodily  transplant- 
ing the  very  latest  to  our  shores,  when  other  and 
older  nations  have  not  yet  taken  a  definite  stand, 
was  typified  in  this  Armory  exhibition  at  New 
York  in  1913. 

It  is  not  improbable  that  our  aesthetic  ideals 
will  undergo  a  very  radical  change  within  the 
next  few  decades.  On  the  other  hand  the  pendu- 
lum may  swing  back,  but  that  does  not  absolve 
us  from  the  responsibility  of  appreciating  the 
art  problems  of  the  day  as  they  are  expressed 
in  the  more  conventional  paintings  of  our  exhi- 
bitions. The  Cubist,  the  Futurist,  or  to  use  the 
collective  name,  the  Post-Impressionist,  became 


i $8    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

a  rebel  in  the  evolution  of  his  aesthetic  con- 
science. His  experiences,  his  disappointments, 
in  the  traditional  methods  made  him  what  he  is 
today,  and  the  serious  student  of  art  cannot 
hope  to  reach  his  point  of  view  by  any  different 
road.  The  understanding  of  his  aims  must 
spring  from  a  firm  belief  in  the  broader  meaning 
of  art  as  a  medium  for  the  realization  of  a  per- 
sonality, rather  than  a  trade  for  the  manufac- 
ture of  pleasing  pictorial  effects.  However,  the 
foundations  of  all  art  will  always  be  sincerity. 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  159 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART 

IN  the  heyday  of  ancient  Greece,  the  undraped 
human  figure  was  the  supreme  expression  of 
representative  art.  Our  museums  abound  not 
only  in  eloquent  fragments  of  the  sculptures 
of  the  Greeks,  but  also  in  complete  copies  of 
their  statues.  Although  the  most  of  them  are 
only  in  white  plaster,  they  nevertheless  readily 
convince  us  of  the  fact  that  the  inspired  Greek 
artist  fully  understood  the  nobility  of  the 
beauty  of  the  human  form. 

In  contemplating  the  vast  galaxy  of  unclad 
beauties,  mostly  reclining,  which  liberally  dotted 
the  walls  of  the  Fine  Arts  Palace  at  the  Panama- 
Pacific  International  Exposition,  one  is  set  to 
think  about  the  underlying  motives  of  this 
promiscuous  pictorial  specilization  in  human 
forms. 

It  is  evident  that  the  classic  point  of  view  is 
present  in  only  a  very  few  instances,  and  that 
the  greater  number  of  nudes  had  little  to  do 
with  abstract  beauty  of  proportion  of  line  and 
rhythm  of  form.    We  all  know  that  to  a  Greek 


i6o    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

sculptor  or  vase  painter  a  human  body  was  first 
of  all  a  symbol  of  nature,  the  very  noblest 
product  of  creation  from  a  purely  artistic  point 
of  view.  Even  though  these  statues  and  por- 
traits bear  the  jiames  of  individuals,  their 
abstract  beauty  is  so  compelling  as  to  make  us 
forget  the  personality  represented.  Often  these 
noble  forms  are  a  type  of  beauty,  an  idealized 
expression  of  what  probably  did  not  in  reality 
exist,  either  then  or  todav.  All  of  the  statues  of 
Apollo  or  of  Venus  possessed  in  common  certain 
qualities  of  beauty  which  frequently  assumed 
almost  the  character  of  an  artistic  convention. 
This  conventional  treatment  may  be  summed 
up  in  the  term — classic  style. 

What,  then,  more  definitely,  is  this  classic 
style  and  why  do  we  seem  so  lacking  in  it?  In- 
dubitably it  was  not  a  faithful  reproduction  of  one 
particular  figure,  but  rather  the  result  of  obser- 
vations of  a  great  many  models,  each  contribut- 
ing in  its  way  to  stimulate  the  artist's  sense  of 
form  and  proportion.  The  classic  statues  have 
been  analyzed  by  the  philosophically  inclined 
archaeologist  and  a  canon  of  beauty  laid  down 
as  representing  the  fundamental  artistic  require- 
ments of  the  human  proportions  in  art.    Any- 


THE  PALACE  OF  FINE  ARTS,    SAN   FRANCISCO 


PLATE  XXVII 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 

Colin  Campbell  Coopek,  N.  a. 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  161 

body  may  have  access  to  this  table  of  measure- 
ments nowadays.  It  is  the  common  property  of 
all  artists.  And  still  our  nudes,  in  sculpture  or 
in  painting,  are  scarcely  as  good  as  the  classic 
figures.  I  take  it  that  the  idea  of  physical  repre- 
sentation, or  rather  imitation,  never  guided  the 
great  Greek  artist  in  his  work.  The  naturalistic 
figure  is  a  creation  of  the  modern  dime-museum, 
the  most  nefarious  agency  for  the  perversion  of 
public  taste.  Possibly  the  great  sculptor  of  the 
past,  if  he  had  had  at  his  command  the  technical 
facilities  of  the  modern  age,  might  have  been 
tempted  to  imitate  with  the  idea  of  absolute  de- 
ception. However,  imitation  did  not  appeal  to 
him,  neither  of  form  nor  of  colour,  and  still 
artist  and  lay-public  alike  admire  the  beauty  of 
classic  sculpture.  People  even  rave  over  it  when 
sadly  diluted  into  small  machine-made  replicas 
in  marble  from  Italian  sculpture-factories.  It  is 
probably  in  that  case  the  marble  that  lures  the 
multitude.  Marble  seems  to  be  rated  higher 
than  any  other  substance,  though  it  went  beg- 
ging after  the  fire  of  1906  in  San  Francisco,  when 
great  quantities  of  good  marble  of  many  aban- 
doned doorsteps  were  carried  off  for  pavements. 
To  me  those  small  Italian  commercial  replicas 


162    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

certainly  hold  but  little  inspiration  in  their  cold, 
machine-made,  technical  brutality. 

But  to  return  to  the  live,  pulsating  quality  of 
the  ancient  marble.  The  individual  model,  pos- 
ing for  such  a  figure,  became  subordinated  to  the 
artistic  formula  based  on  form  and  line  and  pro- 
portion. Nothing  is  simpler  and  more  convinc- 
ing, as  showing  the  dignified  formality  of  such 
art,  than  the  treatment  of  the  hair;  and  the 
same  conventional  handling  of  the  major  parts 
of  the  body,  and  of  many  minor  details  as  well 
was  carried  out  almost  on  the  basis  of  a  uniform 
artistic  understanding.  The  ears  were  always 
beautiful  in  proportion  and  well  attached.  They 
did  not  so  much  express  individuality  in  ears  as 
an  ideal  ear,  made  up  of  all  the  qualities  of  the 
most  perfect  ears  that  could  be  found.  The 
hands,  the  feet,  were  shaped  as  nature  produces 
them  but  seldom  and  only  in  her  most  favorite 
children.  But  what  has  remained  of  this  artistic 
conception  of  the  human  form  in  our  present- 
day  figures  ?  We  see  little  of  it  after  the  disinte- 
gration of  the  Roman  Empire  until  the  Renais- 
sance, several  periods  intervening  of  the  most 
primitive  childlike  renderings  of  human  form. 
The  Renaissance,  again,  gave  us  many  noble 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  163 

expressions  of  undraped  human  forms  which  a 
prej  udiced  world  unfortunately  declines  to  receive 
on  the  same  basis  as  the  ancient  classics.  With 
the  northward  movement  of  art,  the  human 
form,  owing  to  climatic  conditions,  apparently 
became  less  familiar  to  artists,  and  more  and 
more  obscured,  owing  to  the  artists'  lack  of 
every-day  opportunities  for  the  study  of  the 
nude,  an  opportunity  which  the  Greek  sculptors 
enjoyed  in  their  gymnasia  and  elsewhere.  I 
wonder  what  would  have  happened  if  figure  art 
had  become  the  heritage  of  a  civilized  people 
living  in  the  tropics? 

The  artist  of  the  north  found  himself  obliged 
to  resort  to  the  artificialities  of  the  studio  model, 
and  to  all  appearances  he  has  never — with  few 
exceptions — been  able  to  free  himself  from  the 
influence  of  the  individual,  the  one  person 
among  many  whom  he  might  see  unconven- 
tionally devoid  of  garments.  This  limited  oppor- 
tunity for  study  may  be  one  cause  of  the  many 
banalities  present-day  sculptors  and  painters 
too  often  perpetrate.  In  many  cases  their  pro- 
ductions are  nothing  but  imitations;  too  seldom 
are  they  translations  or  interpretations  by 
means  of  artistic  symbols.   Many  are  outspoken 


164    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

in  their  outright  brazen  attempt  to  be  sugges- 
tive and  even  sensual.  For  these  we  are  in- 
debted, I  believe,  to  a  certain  coterie  of  modern 
French  painters  who  either  accidentally  or  by 
cunning  produced  many  nudes  of  the  kind  now 
universally  recognized  as  the  American  saloon 
nude.  Water  will  find  its  level,  and  the  saloon 
nude,  conceived  in  the  saloon  spirit,  never  could 
rise  to  an  appeal  free  from  the  base  atmosphere 
of  its  sphere  of  influence.  Most  of  these  pictures 
are  openly  sensual,  and  one  cannot  but  admire 
the  unalloyed  honesty  of  the  efforts  of  their 
painters  in  that  regard.  No  other  potentialities 
of  appeal — and  there  are  some — in  these  pic- 
tures have  any  chance.  This  type  of  picture  was 
scarcely  taken  half  so  seriously  here  as  abroad, 
and  the  unabashed  naivete  of  the  many  pseudo- 
Bouguereaus  who  produced  countless  Eves, 
Venuses,  and  other  alluring  ladies  is  really 
amazing.  As  far  as  that  noble  institution,  the 
saloon  nude,  is  concerned,  we  seem  to  have  con- 
quered the  mania,  and  eventually  we  will  cast 
it  into  oblivion,  together  with  the  temple  in 
which  it  symbolized  the  physical  nature  of  its 
devotees.  But  the  nudes  still  continue  to  ap- 
pear, or  rather  imitations  of  the  naked  studio 


MORNING 


PLATE  XXVIII 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Norwood  H.  MacGILVARI 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  165 

models  which  the  artist  was  neither  able  to  for- 
get, owing  to  the  rarety  of  the  occasion,  nor  to 
put  into  artistic  language.  Far  too  many  mod- 
ern nudes  impress  one  as  mere  literal  imitations 
of  a  particular  model,  sometimes  to  an  embar- 
rassing degree  of  photographic  physical  resem- 
blance. 

It  is  so  very  tempting,  owing  to  the  possibili- 
ties of  deception  in  the  painter's  medium  nowa- 
days, to  yield  to  a  desire  to  imitate.  The  worker 
in  three  dimensions,  the  sculptor  in  marble, 
knows  that  nobody  will  take  his  creation  for  the 
real,  but  the  painter,  although  he  is  deprived  of 
the  third  dimension  in  his  work — in  the  physical 
sense — often  allows  himself  to  cater  to  a  cer- 
tain public  taste  and  produce  the  near-photo- 
graphic. It  seems  to  me  that  as  with  everything 
else,  the  best  nudes  might  be  painted  out  of  the 
head,  as  Bocklin,  the  German-Swiss,  painted 
his  in  practically  all  of  his  flgural  compositions. 
Such  naked,  sea-roving  creatures  as  he  painted 
could  not  be  found  in  the  flesh,  and  that  reason 
alone  eventually  forced  him  into  absolute  inde- 
pendence of  models.  Many  of  the  greatest 
painters  must  undoubtedly  have  produced  their 
work    in    that    way.      How    otherwise    could 


i66    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

Jordaens,  Snyders,  or  even  Rubens  have  painted 
their  large  canvases  of  human  anatomy  with 
such  remarkable  spontaneousness  and  ease? 
Those  things  cannot  be  done  in  the  presence  of 
the  models  nor  directly  from  smaller  sketches 
and  studies. 

The  most  flagrant  of  examples  of  this  photo- 
graphic type  of  so-called  art  was  "Stella." 
Have  you  seen  Stella?  Well,  I  fancy  you  have 
seen  that  reposing  damsel,  of  coke-oven  color- 
ing. The  pigs  in  the  painting  in  the  Argentine 
Section,  at  the  Panama-Pacific  International 
Exposition,  glowing  with  colour,  which  looked 
as  if  they  had  swallowed  some  burning  incan- 
descent lamp,  were  in  no  way  inferior  to  the 
naturalistic,  apoplectic,  roseate  hues  of  Stella. 
But  aside  from  the  colour,  so  effectively  en- 
hanced by  orange  reflectors,  carefully  concealed, 
what  of  her  so-called  beauty?  What  of  her  so- 
called  aesthetic  charm,  of  which  we  were  told  so 
enthusiastically?  It  must  have  pleased  many  a 
high  school  boy  to  discover  an  atmosphere  of 
indecency  sanctioned  by  popular  approval.  But 
was  there  really  any  beauty  about  this  picture? 
Honestly,  does  anybody  think  he  could  live  with 
such  a  picture,  such  a  roseate  incarnation  of 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  167 

farm-maid's  plumpness?  Of  course  I  take  it  the 
illusion  of  reality  was  a  great  factor  in  the  whole 
affair,  but  as  a  matter  of  form,  proportion,  and 
abstract  beauty,  Stella  was  a  sad  piece  of  aca- 
demic draughtsmanship.  I  shall  forthwith  be 
accused  of  jealousy  by  that  part  of  the  public 
who  know  my  small  efforts  in  paint  and  who 
believe  that  the  manner  of  painting  seen  in 
Stella  is  so  difficult  that  jealousy  prompts  me  to 
make  such  emphatic  statements.  The  portfolios 
of  the  average  well-trained  painter  contain  many 
convincing  indications  of  his  ability  to  paint 
photographic  likeness  of  a  nude,  and  Stella  is 
nothing  but  a  work  of  either  immaturity  or  con- 
scious deceit.  Stella  as  a  starting  point  is  most 
interesting,  because  it  is  an  emphatic  example  of 
the  sensuous  nude  which  in  the  very  artificiality 
of  its  existence  has  no  relation  to  our  own  time. 
The  undraped  figure  is  not  as  common  a  sight 
in  our  midst  as  in  the  classic  periods,  and  that 
consideration  alone  makes  the  position  of  the 
modern  painter  of  figures  doubly  difficult,  and 
human  weakness  puts  many  temptations  in  his 
way.  He  ought  more  and  more  to  be  satisfied 
with  a  conventional  form.  He  ought  to  appeal 
to  our  artistic  senses,  and  not  to  the  physical 


168    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

instincts.  There  was  nothing  noble  about 
Stella,  and  a  good  deal  that  was  base,  vulgar, 
physical.  However,  many  of  the  nudes  in  the 
legitimate  art  exhibition  were  of  similar  cali- 
ber, particularly  in  Portuguese  art,  where  the 
most  offensive  examples  of  mere  physical  naked- 
ness abounded.  The  life-size  marble  portrait  of 
a  society  lady  without  any  clothes,  not  even  the 
proverbial  fig-leaf,  presented  a  sad  mixture  of 
technical  dullness  and  hopeless  insipidity  of 
style.  As  an  example  of  close  study  of  the  nude 
nothing  could  have  been  more  painstaking.  But 
the  horrible  nakedness  of  the  thing  is  appalling. 
Anybody  who  lives  in  the  home  town  of  the  artist 
and  model  must  have  been  morbidly  pleased  at 
having  thus  been  taken  into  the  confidence  of  the 
lady.  In  other  words,  she  is  an  individual,  defi- 
nite person,  and  not  even  being  possessed  of 
good  proportions,  she  appears  merely  naked, 
devoid  of  idealization,  with  no  appeal  to  one's 
sense  of  beauty.  One  feels  the  colossal  waste  of 
material,  time,  and  energy.  In  her  company  I 
observed  a  typical  nude  allegory,  a  reclining 
studio  nude,  unconvincingly  put  into  an  aquatic 
background.  What  a  difference  between  a  per- 
formance, if  it  is  a  performance  at  all,  of  this 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  i6g 

type  and  Besnard's  lady  with  the  rabbits,  in 
the  Luxemburg!  Some  may  little  care  for  the 
vigorous  colour  of  Besnard,  but  the  personality 
of  this  energetic  painter  manifests  itself  in  every 
artistic  phase  of  this  very  remarkable  nude. 
Although  it  deals  with  feminine  charm  of  a  some- 
what over-ripe  type,  the  wonderful  harmony  of 
artistic  expression  of  what  may  well  have  been 
an  entirely  out-of-the-head  painting  is  most 
compelling.  The  distribution  of  light  and  shade, 
the  effect  of  the  sunlight,  the  live  flesh  and 
sound  anatomical  construction,  are  all  active 
in  making  it  a  very  commanding  performance. 
Though  florid  and  Rubens-like  in  type,  it  is  a 
masterly  picture,  and  it  might  be  called  "Na- 
ture" in  its  wonderful  wealth  of  fine  colour, 
light,  and  animated  drawing.  Representing  the 
opposite,  the  nudes  by  Mercie  challenge  com- 
parison by  their  sweet  bonbon-box-cover  type. 
They  are,  as  far  as  I  have  observed,  the  more 
popular  of  the  two,  but  for  what  reason  is  hard 
to  understand,  unless  the  crescent  ornaments  in 
the  hair  of  his  ladies  account  for  it.  In  the  Bes- 
nard nude  the  face  is  concealed  behind  the 
raised  arm  of  the  figure.  The  faces  of  Mercie's 
nudes  show  the  charming  harmlessness  of  a  wax 


170    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

doll  of  the  better  type.  No  character,  nothing — 
just  a  face  with  two  eyes,  a  nose,  a  mouth,  and 
other  accessories — though  a  certain  idealization 
of  the  form  of  the  body  contributes  the  saving 
grace  of  these  trivial  pictures.  As  to  painting, 
I  do  not  think  it  was  fair  to  have  them  hung  as 
they  were  in  San  Francisco,  as  pendants  to  Bes- 
nard,  but  still,  who  could  hang  in  the  company 
of  that  dynamo — perhaps  Simon. 

On  the  whole,  the  French  seem  now  to  pre- 
serve a  much  more  subjective  attitude  in  their 
art,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  painter,  than 
the  other  countries.  The  international  section 
at  the  Panama-Pacific  International  Exposition 
contained  a  delightful  nude  at  the  spring,  of 
wonderful  texture  and  great  restraint.  In  this 
age  of  actualities,  the  nude  by  Agthe  was  very 
gratifying  in  contrast  with  the  many  atelier 
studies  of  naked  women  hung  in  the  American 
section.  Such  things  as  Gutmann's  lady  with 
the  parrot  as  the  protector  of  her  virtues  and  a 
small  velvet  ribbon  as  an  identification  mark 
was  as  banal  as  anything  I  have  seen  for  some 
time.  It  was  well  painted,  in  a  general  way,  but 
why  indulge  in  the  cheap  trick  of  attracting  at- 
tention by  such  means?  In  the  same  class  must 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  171 

be  put  Glackens's  fragments  of  a  discomposing 
lady  propped  up  on  a  chaise  longue. 

What  may  be  done  in  the  modern  naturalistic 
vein  Carles  demonstrates  in  a  small,  square  pic- 
ture of  a  nude  against  a  dark  background,  pre- 
sented to  the  San  Francisco  Art  Association  by 
Mrs.  Harriman.  If  we  had  a  half-dozen  more 
nudes  of  the  Carles  type,  it  would  be  well,  but 
the  Glackens  type  certainly  is  of  no  profit  either 
to  the  profession  or  to  the  public.  Friesecke's 
pictures,  with  their  healthy  glamour  of  colour, 
life,  light,  and  atmosphere,  strike  a  particu- 
larly happy  note,  though  his  outdoor  nudes  are 
only  half  as  interesting  as  his  boudoir  scenes. 
Friesecke  has  the  faculty  of  making  use  of  the 
model  without  being  everlastingly  under  the 
spell  of  the  individual's  physical  features.  His 
art  achieves  a  personal  style,  the  individual  note 
possessed  by  Besnard,  and  it  is  charmingly  com- 
pelling in  more  than  one  way.  Particularly  in- 
teresting is  Robert  Reid's  nude  before  a  Japan- 
ese screen,  owned  by  Mr.  Spencer  Kellog.  One 
feels  that  is  not  merely  an  academic  study  of  a 
model,  but  an  underlying  idea  as  well.  My 
imagination  may  be  playing  me  a  trick  when  I 
see  some  very  subtle  symbolism  in  this  com- 


172    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

bination  of  what  is  popularly  but  wrongly  called 
a  stork  in  this  country  and  the  somewhat  pen- 
sive attitude  of  the  graceful  young  woman. 
Reid  gives  such  individual  technical  charm  to 
his  easel  pictures  that  they  at  once  assume  a 
quality  of  their  own.  Of  a  totally  different  type, 
Sargent's  well-known  Nubian  girl  compelled 
great  interest,  not  to  be  compared  to  the  im- 
pressionistic technical  methods  of  a  painting  of 
the  Reid  type,  but  most  interesting  from  a  very 
keen  quality  of  rhythmic  outline,  which  ran 
spirally  through  the  picture  from  top  to  bottom. 
It  is  a  wonderful  accomplishment,  this  Nubian 
girl,  in  spite  of  its  naturally  leathery  colour.  As 
in  Reid's  seated  figure,  one  had  here  again  the 
satisfaction  that  the  artist  went  beyond  the 
model  in  emphasizing  certain  suggested  quali- 
ties which,  accentuated,  became  the  real  note 
of  interest  in  the  picture. 

Essentially,  the  trouble  nowadays  with  so 
many  painters  of  the  nude  is  that  they  are 
utterly  unable  to  free  themselves  from  the  influ- 
ence of  the  individual  before  them.  It  is  here, 
again,  as  with  the  landscape  painter  of  immature 
attitude.  He  copies  directly,  clinging  desper- 
ately to  the  belief  that  his  only  salvation  lies  in 


C  ARM  EL  COAST 


ri.ATK  XXIX 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
William  Ritsi  hel,  n.  a. 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  173 

the  faithfulness  of  his  adherence  to  the  fact. 
In  a  nude  of  similar  conception,  this  becomes 
doubly  painful  because  the  indelicate  exposure 
of  a  more  or  less  defective  individual  thus 
brought  about  adds  to  the  discomfort  of  the 
observer,  who  is  seldom  rewarded  for  his  pa- 
tience by  other  artistic  qualities  in  the  picture. 
The  Greek  artist  did  not  give  us  this  personal 
introduction  to  the  model.  He  does  not  reveal 
the  privacy  of  physical  characteristics  of  an  in- 
dividual model.  It  was  partly  this  physicalness 
in  painting  which  moved  the  Puritan  forefathers 
to  turn  against  art;  unable  to  resist,  in  their 
curious  lack  of  self-control,  they  condemned  all 
art  and  poured  out  the  child  with  the  bath.  The 
suggestion  of  immorality  which  there  is  in  art 
for  many  people  is  related  to  the  incompetency 
of  the  professional  painters  who  are  unable  to 
rise  above  mere  physical  suggestion.  There  is 
something  repulsive  about  the  vulgarity  of  the 
portrait  nude  that  mitigates  against  the  fair 
treatment  of  the  whole  problem  in  the  hands  of 
the  public.  In  other  words,  the  nude  which  has 
an  artistic  message  is  luckily  devoid  of  the 
voluptuous.  Its  claim  is  not  physical,  but 
based  on   rhythmic  contour,  good  proportion 


174    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

and  spacing  within  the  frame,  and  pure  color 
and  tonal  qualities. 

One  of  the  very  finest  examples  of  modern  art, 
one  that  is  beyond  all  question  free  from  the 
suggestive  and  full  of  the  logic  of  its  milieu,  is 
Millet's  "Goose  Girl,"  in  a  private  gallery  in 
Bordeaux.  Here  we  see  the  budding  form  of  a 
country  girl,  relinquishing  her  task  of  leading 
the  village  flock  of  geese  and  quietly  dipping 
into  the  shallow  waters  of  a  pool.  Whether  ever 
observed  in  actuality  by  the  artist  or  not  I 
neither  question  nor  know — I  well  can  go  fur- 
ther, and  say  I  do  not  care  at  all — but  the  whole 
situation  is  so  convincing  in  everything  that 
nothing  but  complete  aesthetic  satisfaction  will 
result  from  a  contemplation  of  this  Millet  mas- 
terpiece. As  another  example  of  absolute  purity 
of  form,  devoid  of  any  base  quality,  Arthur 
Matthews's  "Art  and  Nature"  deserves  high 
praise  for  its  singular  conbination  of  strength 
and  idealism.  How  sadly  unconvincing,  along- 
side of  these,  is  the  "September  Morning"  by 
Chabas — that  much-known  picture  of  dubious 
reputation.  It  is  a  shame  that  it  should  be  so, 
because  it  is  a  masterpiece  of  liquid  painting, 
but  the  artist  is  not  free  from  the  accusation  of 


THE  NUDE  IN  ART  175 

being  guilty  of  putting  a  pampered  Parisian 
model  into  surroundings  in  which  she  is  not  at 
home.  It  is  the  aesthetic  antithesis  of  Millet's 
"Goose  Girl."  It  does  not  ring  true,  and  the 
Chicago  policeman  who  exceeded  his  authority 
by  having  it  removed  from  the  gaze  of  the  curi- 
ous public  confessed  to  a  fitting  artistic  instinct 
which  the  artist  himself  did  not  have,  or  did  not 
care  to  exercise.  The  latter,  of  course,  can  be 
the  only  assumption  in  a  man  who  has  given  so 
many  evidences  of  excellent  artistic  powers. 

Idealization  is  not  one  of  the  qualities  ac- 
cepted as  necessary  in  a  painting  among  a  great 
many  of  the  radical  naturalists  of  present-day 
schools,  but  while  one  may  rarely  be  offended 
by  the  candid  realism  of  a  still-life  or  landscape, 
the  insistent  vulgarity  of  the  modern  nude  in  art 
is  scarcely  reconciliable  with  aesthetic  demands. 
We  are  indebted  to  modern  tendencies  for  much 
wholesome  agitation,  not  always  successful  in 
its  results,  but  in  the  interpretation  of  the  hu- 
man form  we  are  farther  than  ever  away  from 
the  classic  ideal. 


iy6  POINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE 

WHILE  in  the  historic  periods  of  the  de- 
velopment of  European  art  practical  support 
was  furnished  exclusively  by  the  dominant  reli- 
gious and  political  organizations,  such  as  the 
church  and  the  aristocracy,  the  growth  of  art 
here  in  America  clearly  demonstrates  how  in  a 
truly  democratic  country  the  very  life  and  exis- 
tence of  art  may  well  depend  entirely  upon  the 
broadest  kind  of  popular  support,  and  not 
merely  upon  the  interest  of  a  few  of  the  well-to-do 
or  socially  prominent  or  ambitious.  Patronage 
of  art  has  never  been  confined  in  this  coun- 
try to  any  small,  select  group  of  interests  cen- 
tralized in  the  church,  the  government  or  the 
moneyed  aristocracy,  and  it  is  this  fact  that 
raises  one's  hopes  to  expect  more  of  the  art  of 
our  country  in  the  future  than  of  that  of  any 
modern  country  abroad,  where  conditions  in  art 
patronage  have  suffered  little  modification. 

During  the  greater  part  of  the  Renaissance 
the  church  was  practically  the  sole  patron. 
Artists  looked  to  the  church  for  commissions  to 


WHAT  AN   INDIAN  THINKS 


PLATE  W\ 


From  thr  Oil  Painting  by 

Maynard  Dixon 

Owned  by 

F.  M.  DANZIGER,   Esq.,  Los  Angeles.  Cal. 


ON  AR  T  PATRONAGE  177 

support  themselves  and  those  dependent  upon 
them,  and  this  one-sided  patronage,  as  at  any- 
other  period,  produced  a  very  one-sided  art, 
reflecting  only  one  definite  phase  of  civilization. 
We  are  almost  forced  to  believe  that  the  artists 
took  no  interest  in  the  many  artistic  suggestions 
which  must  undoubtedly  have  come  to  them  in 
those  days  from  the  many  other  varied  aspects 
of  life;  one  looks  in  vain  for  anything  that  might 
indicate  that  their  Italy  was  populated  by  any- 
thing but  Madonnas  and  Saints.  This  concen- 
tration upon  one  subject  naturally  produced 
the  flower  of  religious  paintings,  but  it  shows 
also  what  exclusive  patronage  will  result  in. 
Eventually,  the  worldly  nobles  and  the  moneyed 
aristocrats  assumed  the  responsibility  of  caring 
for  the  promotion  of  artistic  aims,  either  to 
gratify  aesthetic  ambition  or  for  purely  selfish 
purposes  of  self-glorification.  And  so  we  find 
during  practically  all  of  the  fifteenth  and  six- 
teenth century  periods,  throughout  many  coun- 
tries, art  put  into  the  service  of  the  aristocracy, 
to  help  preserve  their  positions  by  perpetuating 
the  dazzling,  awe-inspiring  phases  of  their  more 
or  less  artificial  existence.  The  masses  had  to  be 
impressed  with  the  wealth,  the  power,  and  the 


i?8   PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

glory  of  the  reigning  families  to  keep  them 
cowed  and  in  servile  obedience.  A  true  art  of 
the  common  people  in  those  days  did  not  exist. 
The  early  Dutch,  so  independent  in  many  ways, 
had  far  less  of  this  sycophantic  attitude  toward 
religious  and  political  institutions,  and  one  feels 
with  great  joy,  on  more  than  one  occasion,  that 
the  antics  of  the  lower  classes,  as  one  sees  them 
in  the  pictures  of  Breughel,  Steen,  Brouwer, 
etc.,  must,  at  the  time  of  their  production,  have 
violated  all  the  traditional  rules  of  the  academic 
dignity  of  accepted  subjects.  One  enjoys  noth- 
ing more  than  the  betes  noirs  of  these  various 
periods — those  independent,  socialistic  spirits 
who  scorn  the  artificial,  and  like  Hogarth  among 
the  English,  jump  into  the  whirlpool  of  every- 
day life.  History  shows,  very  consistently  and 
gradually,  the  slipping  away  of  the  arts  from 
the  grasp  of  the  church  and  the  state. 

So  today  no  government  openly  dares  to  pre- 
scribe subjects  for  the  pictures  of  its  state-sup- 
ported prize  students,  although  everything  is 
tried  to  encourage  young  artists  to  help  in  the 
perpetuation  of  the  system  in  power  and  in 
making  more  secure  existing  political  institu- 
tions.    To    the   church,    the   change   amounts 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  179 

almost  to  a  pathetic  collapse.  The  religious  painter 
exists  no  more — there  is  simply  no  such  thing 
as  a  religious  painting  in  the  sense  of  the  old 
sycophantic  flattery  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church,  although  I  believe  we  are  by  no  means 
less  religious  than  our  deceased  forefathers. 
There  is  a  splendid  opportunity  for  our  young- 
est sister  of  the  family  of  churches,  born  on  our 
own  soil,  to  avail  itself,  in  its  generous  way,  of 
art  for  the  popularizing  of  its  institutions.  The 
whole  question  of  patronage  has  changed,  and 
it  presents,  here  in  America  particularly,  some 
most  interesting  and  novel  phases. 

The  most  significant  thing  is  the  growing  in- 
dependence of  the  modern  artist  as  compared 
with  the  older  man.  Where  little  was  done  ex- 
cept by  commission,  a  spirit  of  self-satisfaction 
and  loss  of  individuality  could  easily  develop, 
while  in  our  modern  age  the  artist's  thoughts  are 
seldom  diverted  from  his  work  by  the  interested 
patron.  That  is  to  say,  modern  artists  produce, 
first  of  all,  to  satisfy  themselves,  to  realize  their 
own  ideal,  irrespective  of  the  objective  use  and 
application  of  the  picture.  The  modern  spirit  in 
art  owes  much  to  its  freedom  from  official  pat- 
ronage, and  it  is  singularly  true  that  the  path- 


180    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

finders,  the  innovators  in  art,  could  dare  to  fol- 
low their  convictions  only  on  account  of  this 
very  severance  of  official  patronage  and  the 
artist. 

Originally,  in  the  earlier  days  of  American 
civilization,  we  cared  naught  for  the  home  pro- 
duct in  art — in  fact  we  most  consistently  pre- 
ferred art  made  abroad.  The  few  artists  at  home 
were  given  to  understand  that  there  was  no 
hope  for  them  in  this  great  country.  This 
pseudo-civilization  continued  for  a  long  time, 
even  into  the  days  of  the  middle  of  the  last  cen- 
tury, when  we  had  already  produced  good 
artists  like  Innes,  whose  work  compared  favor- 
ably with  that  of  then  popular  European  col- 
leagues. The  only  thing  these  artists  could  do, 
often,  was  to  scrape  enough  money  together  and 
turn  to  countries  where  governments  and  asso- 
ciations more  kindly  disposed  were  willing  to  fill 
their  pockets  and  decorate  their  yawning  but- 
tonholes. That  artists  have  to  live,  seldom 
occurred  to  anybody  at  that  time  in  this  coun- 
try, and  our  very  rapidly  increasing  art  patron- 
age of  today  is  probably  more  often  moved  by  a 
vain^desire  for  something  we  observe  other 
nations    in    proud    possession    of   than    by    an 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  181 

acknowledgment  of  the  responsibilities  of  the 
public  toward  the  artist.  In  our  very  earliest 
days  of  American  art,  in  Colonial  days,  the  his- 
torians tell  us  of  the  signs  for  tradesmen's  shops 
our  painters  had  to  produce  in  order  to  eke  out  a 
living.  Since  Watteau  and  even  Titian  and 
others  did  similar  things,  no  odium  should  be 
attached  to  this  experience  of  the  American 
painter.  I  think  conditions  generally  were  no 
different  in  our  pioneer  days  from  what  had 
been  the  case  under  similar  conditions  abroad. 
Slowly  at  first,  and  then  with  increasing  rapidity, 
we  have  changed,  and  at  the  present  moment  an 
art  interest  is  holding  the  country  in  a  grip  so 
vital  that  one  almost  fears  its  ability  to  develop 
any  further.  It  is  interesting  to  compare  present 
methods  of  support  abroad  with  those  in  the 
United  States.  Abroad,  it  is  still  the  govern- 
ment, officially,  which  controls  the  channels 
through  which  the  artist  receives  his  financial 
and  social  encouragement,  and  the  latter  is  by 
no  means  less  welcome  than  the  former.  Human 
vanity  has  in  the  past  deprived  America  and 
does  even  yet  of  the  presence  of  a  great  many 
very  capable  painters  who  would  rather  live  in  a 
country  where  decorations,  titles,  and  other  like 


182    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

distinctions  give  the  artist  a  social  standing 
which  he  cannot  as  yet  hope  to  attain  at  home. 
To  the  man  of  artistic  perceptions,  it  may  not 
mean  much  when  he  contemplates  the  kite-tail 
of  honour  and  decoration  in  the  biography  of 
American  artists  like  Alexander  Harrison,  who 
cast  his  lot  entirely  with  European  interest.  His 
brother  Birge,  who  stayed  at  home,  one  of  our 
very  able  landscape  painters,  pales  into  insigni- 
ficance in  a  biographical  catalogue  alongside  his 
brother  for  lack  of  any  such  distinctions  as  are 
indicated  by  orders,  decorations,  memberships 
in  societies,  medals,  honorary  offices,  degrees, 
and  what  not.  Such  were  the  penalties  of  stay- 
ing at  home,  one  might  say.  But  one  may  care 
for  such  things,  and  one  may  not.  That  may 
well  explain  the  social  discrepancies  between  the 
two  brothers.  Unfortunately,  the  public  follows 
the  artist  whose  biography  looks  much  like  the 
suitcase  of  the  man  who  went  to  Europe  for  the 
first  time,  and  who  wants  everybody,  on  his  re- 
turn home,  to  know  where  he  has  been. 

After  all,  the  difference  in  artistic  quality  be- 
tween the  work  of  Alexander  and  of  Birge  Harri- 
son is  not  truly  indicated  by  the  number  of 
their  medals,  etc.   But  gradually  we  are  supply- 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  183 

ing  the  means  of  ready  classification  of  the  artis- 
tic profession,  and  it  looks  as  if  we  were  going 
to  outdo  Europe,  at  least  in  the  establishment 
of  monetary  prizes  and  honorary  distinctions  an 
artist  may  receive  at  home.  Ours  do  not  as  yet 
mean  quite  so  much  as  the  foreign  article,  but 
eventually  time  will  supply  the  dignity  neces- 
sary for  their  effect.  The  generous  attitude  of 
the  private  citizen  in  our  country  has  furnished 
the  most  effective  means  for  the  cultivation  of 
the  fine  arts.  And  by  that,  only  one  thing  can 
be  meant,  and  that  is  the  expenditure  of  money 
for  the  support  of  the  profession.  We  may 
prattle  eternally  about  art,  write  about  art,  and 
profess  to  be  interested  in  it,  but  the  only  means 
by  which  the  growth  of  art  can  be  measured  in 
any  country  is  the  relative  amount  of  money 
put  at  its  disposal.  The  world  has  seen  some 
very  interesting  examples  of  the  power  of 
money  in  promoting  art.  Money  alone,  without 
national  professional  ability  for  artistic  produc- 
tion, of  course  will  not  suffice,  but  after  the 
artistic  capacity  of  a  people  has  been  developed, 
the  thing  most  necessary  is  financial  support. 
Competent  artists  will  always  go  to  those  coun- 
tries, those  places,  where  they  may  expect  at 


184    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

least  to  make  a  living  and  possibly  a  little  more. 
The  establishment  and  success  of  Munich  as  an 
art  center  was  due  entirely  to  the  lavish  endow- 
ment of  artistic  enterprises  by  a  Bavarian  king 
who  could  easily  have  lost  in  the  promotion  of 
his  city  scheme  against  the  rivalry  of  better 
climatic  conditions  elsewhere.  But  art  in 
Munich  flourished,  though  in  a  raw  climate,  by 
lavish  patronage.  The  one  similar  American 
example  is  that  of  Pittsburg,  where,  under  very 
uninviting  general  conditions  the  munificence 
of  one  citizen  has  caused  the  most  important  art 
exhibitions  on  the  American  continent  to  be 
held.  Surely  there  are  other  cities  than  Pitts- 
burg in  the  United  States  predestined  through 
cultural  interest,  artistic  atmosphere,  and  cli- 
matic conditions  to  be  leaders  in  art.  But, 
curiously  the  liberal  interest  of  one  man  has 
provided  for  Pittsburg  the  dintinction  of  hold- 
ing the  most  important  artistic  function  in  the 
United  States,  in  the  biennial  international  exhi- 
bitions of  the  Carnegie  Institute. 

The  commanding  artistic  standing  of  the 
French  is  the  result  of  their  persistently  kindly 
and  generous  attitude  toward  their  painters  and 
their  artists  in  general.  No  other  people  have  so 


LOWER   MANHATTAN 


FLA  IK  XXXI 


1  rom  the  Oil  Painting  by 

I.I  I  'S    Khcol.I. 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  185 

liberally  and  tactfully  looked  after  the  needs  and 
interests  of  the  artistic  professions  as  have  the 
French,  and  the  national  benefits  derived  have 
surely  paid  for  the  effort.  France  has  set  the 
example  and  furnished  the  method  which  has 
become  the  guiding  principle  for  all  of  the  mod- 
ern countries.  We  here  in  America  have  adopted 
in  many  ways  the  methods  of  the  French,  and 
our  whole  system  of  art  patronage  is  brought 
over  directly  from  Paris — the  Mecca  of  Ameri- 
can artists.  "Les  amis  d'art"  of  France,  imi- 
tated as  the  Friends  of  American  Art  at  Chicago 
and  elsewhere,  have  been  a  blessing  to  the  pro- 
fession, and  a  cultural  boon  to  an  otherwise 
abundantly  flourishing  commercialism  in  that 
section  of  the  country. 

While  organized  support  of  art  in  this  country 
goes  back  as  far  as  1804 — to  the  foundation  of 
the  Pennsylvania  Academy  of  the  Fine  Arts — 
the  more  solid  interest  in  art  was  caused  and 
accentuated  by  the  great  American  Expositions. 
The  year  1876,  the  year  of  the  Centennial,  is 
generally  counted  the  turning-point  which 
marks  the  awakening  of  a  national  conscious- 
ness of  an  American  art.  Again,  the  Chicago 
Exposition  in  1893  stimulated  the  Middle  West, 


186    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

and  the  years  1904  in  St.  Louis,  and  191 5  in 
San  Francisco,  saw  the  American  public  revel  in 
the  pride  of  having  discovered  the  fact,  up  to 
that  time  very  obscure,  that  there  is  such  a 
thing  as  American  art.  Since  the  days  of  Phila- 
delphia we  have  made  enormous  strides,  and 
the  mushroom-like  growth  in  the  United  States 
of  publicly-supported  institutions  and  societies 
devoted  to  art  is  astonishing.  We  learn  from  the 
American  Art  Annual^  in  an  article  by  Miss 
Florence  N.  Levy,  its  editor,  that  in  1882  the 
report  on  art  education  prepared  by  the  United 
States  Government  points  out  thirty  museums 
existing  at  that  time,  and  the  first  volume  of  the 
American  Art  Annual^  published  in  1898,  enum- 
erates forty-one.  Since  then,  the  increase  has 
been  surprising,  so  that  we  have  at  present  in 
this  country  nearly  seven  hundred  and  fifty  art 
museums  and  societies  and  two  hundred  and 
fifty  art  schools — a  total  of  approximately  one 
thousand  organizations.  We  learn  further  from 
the  same  source  that  the  first  American  museum 
to  be  devoted  wholly  to  art  was  the  Wads- 
worth  Athenaeum,  at  Hartford,  opened  in  1842, 
to  which  the  Morgan  Memorial  has  been 
added  within  recent  years.    Among  the  newest 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  187 

museums  are  theWatson  Memorial  at  Rochester, 
dedicated  in  December,  1913,  and  the  Los  An- 
geles Museum,  opened  in  1914.  The  building  of 
the  Minneapolis  Institute  of  Arts  has  lately  been 
dedicated  and  an  important  art  museum  has 
been  opened  at  Cleveland.  Recent  additions  to 
our  art  galleries  include  the  Deshong  Memorial, 
at  Chester,  Pennsylvania;  the  Peter  A.  Gross 
Gallery,  at  Muhlenberg  College,  Allenton,  Penn- 
sylvania; the  Franklin  Simmons  Museum,  at 
Portland,  Maine;  and  the  August  Saint  Gaudens 
Museum,  at  Connot.  All  this  is  gratifying — and 
bewildering.  Many  of  these  museums  are  per- 
manent structures  and  architecturally  of  great 
beauty,  and  their  collections  are  diversified  and 
representative.  The  good  that  some  of  these  in- 
stitutions have  accomplished  for  artists  and 
public  alike  is  very  far-reaching.  Moreover,  I 
believe  that  their  activities  are  much  more  pro- 
gressive and  up-to-date  than  those  of  similar 
institutions  abroad,  and  not  merely  confined  to 
regular  exhibitions,  open  to  the  public  at  little 
or  no  cost,  but  also  broadened  by  very  liberal 
courses  of  lectures,  public  instruction  to  young 
and  old,  and  education  generally  reaching  in  a 
true  democratic  way  far  into  the  hearts  of  all 


188    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

classes  of  people.  This  is  carried  on  in  even  the 
smallest  communities,  and  one  is  amused  and 
pleased  to  find  that  even  a  community  rejoicing 
in  such  a  name  as  Pawhuska,  Oklahoma,  has  an 
art  club  with  a  membership  of  thirty.  This 
Pawhuska  society  proudly  reports  to  the  Ameri- 
can Art  Annual^  referred  to  before  (which  yields 
much  valuable  information),  that  it  organized 
in  191 1,  that  its  dues  are  one  dollar,  and  that 
the  membership,  of  only  thirty,  has  studied 
Italian  art  during  the  last  few  years.  A  photo- 
graph of  the  "Sir  Galahad"  by  Watts  was  given 
to  the  High  School,  and  last,  but  not  least,  an 
exhibition  of  the  work  of  local  artists  was  held 
at  the  home  of  one  of  the  members.  One  is 
immensely  pleased  to  read  of  such  enterprise, 
which  surpasses  the  activities  of  many  much 
larger  cities,  particularly  in  attention  to  local 
artists.  While  this  is  only  an  isolated  instance, 
it  shows  what  we  may  eventually  expect  every- 
where. The  most  promising  feature  of  the  situ- 
ation is  the  inevitableness  of  the  turning  of  our 
industrially  acquired  wealth  toward  artistic 
aims.  This  started  with  general  university  en- 
dowments, and  gradually  begins  to  single  out 
special  professions,  particularly  the  artistic. 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  189 

With  one  notable  exception,  all  this  support 
is  coming  from  the  public.  The  United  States, 
at  the  instigation  of  a  few  interested  congress- 
men, in  the  nineties  provided  for  an  American 
Academy  in  Rome,  where  our  native  talent 
could  go  to  be  inspired,  alongside  of  the  schools 
of  the  European  countries.  Unfortunately,  the 
government  forgot  to  provide  the  money  to  run 
the  place  with,  and  the  director  of  that  institu- 
tion finds  himself  obliged  to  make  periodical 
journeys  home  to  appeal  to  the  public  for  sup- 
port. It  is  not  very  dignified,  but  it  is  sadly 
true.  I  do  not  believe  the  patronage  of  the  gov- 
ernment will  ever  be  more  than  negligible,  and 
it  is  probably  better  that  way,  since  our  govern- 
ment officials  seldom  consider  an  enlightened 
knowledge  of  art  a  necessary  means  to  political 
success.  Nevertheless,  I  am  optimistic  enough 
to  feel  that  we  shall  be  privileged  to  vote  yet  for 
a  president  who  will  be  courageous  enough  to 
include  the  creation  of  a  Secretaryship  of  Fine 
Arts  in  his  platform.  Some  men  in  public  life 
have  as  private  citizens  aided  generously — Sena- 
tor Clark  of  Montana  and  many  others. 

Speaking  of  politics,  we  are  gradually,  also, 
discarding  the  notion  that  art  museums  must 


igo    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

furnish  some  of  the  many  sinecures  necessary 
for  retired  and  disabled  politicians.  It  was  this 
condition  more  than  anything  else,  in  some  in- 
stances in  the  past,  that  retarded  the  growth 
and  development  of  many  organically-healthy 
institutions.  The  Museum  Director  is  beginning 
to  be  recognized  in  this  country  as  belonging  to 
a  special  profession,  as  he  has  long  been  recog- 
nized abroad,  where  men  with  a  thorough 
academic  training  and  a  special  knowledge  of 
archaeology  and  also  of  the  equally  broad  field 
of  modern  art  are  put  at  the  head  of  the  mu- 
seums. Sometimes  we  have  helped  ourselves,  in 
this  country,  by  making  use  of  artists  with 
executive  ability  to  look  after  our  museums  and 
galleries,  and  in  many  such  instances  we  have 
done  remarkably  well.  The  professional  pub- 
licity man  has  sometimes  fitted  in,  welding  a 
bond  between  the  public  and  his  institution  by 
providing  information,  and  sometimes  instruc- 
tion. Eventually  we  shall  take  art  administra- 
tion as  seriously  as  any  other  profession.  One  of 
the  reasons  we  do  not  regard  it  as  we  do  law  or 
medicine  is  because  human  lives  will  never  suffer 
for  mistakes  made  within  its  sphere  of  influence. 
The   artist  individually,   also,  enjoys   better 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  191 

social  advantages  than  heretofore,  although,  as 
with  everything  else  in  this  country,  there  is  no 
national  standard  in  this  regard.  There  are  now 
approximately  five  thousand  artists  living  in 
New  York,  Boston,  Philadelphia,  and  San  Fran- 
cisco, and  decreasing  numbers  as  one  leaves  the 
seaboards.  Their  influence,  as  collectively  ex- 
pressed in  clubs  and  other  organizations,  is  mak- 
ing itself  felt  for  the  good  of  the  commonwealth. 
The  public,  on  the  whole,  has  a  general  disin- 
clination to  patronize  the  artist  directly,  and 
prefers  to  obtain  what  it  wants  through  the 
agency  of  dealers.  The  lack  of  accessible  and  in- 
viting working  quarters  in  many  cities,  outside 
of  the  big  centers,  is  often  the  cause  of  this. 
Many  of  the  dealers  are  of  no  help  to  home  art, 
since  they,  for  purely  commercial  reasons, decline 
to  handle  American  art.  There  is  not  enough 
profit  in  dealing  with  American  pictures,since  the 
standard  of  living  at  home  does  not  permit  the 
American  artist  to  compete  with  his  European 
colleague.  It  is  much  more  lucrative  for  the 
dealer  to  buy  a  picture  in  Europe  for  two 
hundred  and  fifty  francs  and  to  sell  it  for  five 
hundred  dollars  in  America  than  it  is  to  buy  from 
an  American  artist  for  two  hundred  and  fifty 


ig2    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

dollars  and  to  sell  it  for  five  hundred.  The  pic- 
ture dealer  on  the  whole  has  been  little  helpful 
to  the  active  artist,  with  the  exception  of  some 
genuinely  interested  men,  like  the  recently  de- 
ceased Macbeth,  who  in  New  York  for  many 
years  courageously  tied  his  fortunes  exclusively 
to  American  art.  As  for  the  great  number  of 
others,  pictures  are  to  them  commodities,  and 
they  sell  pictures  as  they  would  a  chandelier, 
with  interest  only  in  what  they  can  get  for 
them.  The  one  agency  the  artist  here  in  America 
must  look  to  is  the  direct  patronage  of  the  pub- 
lic, the  practical  support  of  that  part  of  the 
community  which  is  discriminating  and  which  is 
willing  to  learn.  It  is  only  a  small  group,  but 
wherever  it  exists  it  is  the  mainstay  of  artistic 
existence.  The  Panama-Pacific  International 
Exposition  sold  to  individual  visitors  works  of 
art,  mostly  pictures,  amounting  in  price  to  more 
than  one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  dollars. 
Such  support  is  encouraging,  particularly  when 
one  considers  the  generally  high  standard  and 
originality  of  the  work  sold.  No  accurate  sta- 
tistical material  regarding  the  total  amount  of 
money  expended  on  art  in  the  United  States  is 
available,  but  it  is  certainly  very  generous,  and 


ON  ART  PATRONAGE  193 

growing  continually.  The  great  industrial  pros- 
perity of  this  country  will  ultimately  cause  the 
richer  classes  to  turn  much  wealth  toward  edu- 
cational purposes,  and  not  all  of  it  is  going  into 
the  sciences.  America,  to  the  capable  original 
artist,  will  be  as  worth  while  to  dwell  in  as  it 
was  discouraging  only  fifty  years  ago.  The  con- 
ditions abroad  will  for  many  years  not  be  con- 
ducive to  a  very  liberal  patronage  of  the  fine 
arts,  and  already  the  European  artist  is  looking 
toward  America  for  a  market.  Twenty  years  ago 
we  should  easily  have  yielded  to  the  fascination 
of  a  foreign  name,  but  the  American  artist  is 
beginning  to  be  so  firmly  established  in  the  affec- 
tion of  his  own  people  that  national  pride  alone 
will  safeguard  him  forever  against  unfair  foreign 
competition.  Times  have  changed.  Though  we 
have  yet  to  give  a  distinctively  American  art 
exhibition  abroad,  we  are  in  a  fair  way  to  assert 
our  own  artistic  convictions,  alongside  of  the  art 
of  the  world.  It  is  still  customary  for  the  Euro- 
pean to  attach  the  success  of  our  leading  paint- 
ers to  their  European  training,  but  the  number 
of  those  who  are  rooted  in  home  influences  is 
becoming  larger,  and  this  is  for  the  profit  of 
American  art. 


IQ4    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART 

ALTHOUGH  the  loftiest  exemplification  of 
art  is  still  to  the  average  person  the  painting, 
and  an  oil  painting  at  that,  one  cherishes  a  fond 
hope  of  making  the  public  extend  their  interest 
to  other  artistic  matters  besides  paintings.  This, 
briefly,  I  feel  to  be  our  most  urgent  need.  The 
art  sections  of  our  many  civic  organizations  and 
clubs  when  they  devote  themselves  to  art  still 
generally  take  up  the  study  of  painting — Renais- 
sance Madonnas.  My  own  experience  in  this 
respect  in  dealing  with  women's  clubs  is  too 
often  disappointing.  I  am  asked  to  give  a  lec- 
ture on  art,  at  such  and  such  a  date,  and  mis- 
giving at  once  are  evident  when  I  suggest  as  a 
subject  the  beautification  of  the  home  garden, 
the  problems  of  sculpture,  or  even  mural  deco- 
ration— let  alone  architecture.  Paintings  seem 
to  be  regarded  as  the  most  exalted  expression  of 
the  noble,  the  uplifting,  in  art,  and  the  only 
reason  to  which  I  am  able  to  ascribe  this  deep- 
rooted  prejudice  is  that  it  is  the  solitary  art 
expression  which  is  utterly  disconnected  from 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  195 

anything  we  need  and  use,  and  absolutely  irrele- 
vant to  the  particular  needs  of  a  civilization. 
Moreover,  painting  certainly  has  in  itself  all  the 
elements  of  luxury,  and  it  should  for  that  reason 
alone  come  the  very  last  in  the  affection  of  man- 
kind. People  do  not  seem  to  realize  that  a  pic- 
ture has  become  a  rather  perverse  form  of  art, 
and  that  it  is  fundamentally  no  more  important 
than  the  many  expressions  of  the  so-called  de- 
pendent or  applied  arts. 

My  own  faith,  then,  in  pictures  is  not  so  very 
great  either  as  an  exhaustive  expression  of  the 
art  of  a  people  or  as  of  fundamental  educational 
value  for  the  large  masses.  If  we  had  consist- 
ently developed  our  art  by  inherited  instincts, 
we  should  probably  never  have  arrived  at  the 
making  of  transportable  pictures,  such  as  we 
see  now  by  the  thousands  in  art-shops,  exhibi- 
tions, and  galleries  generally.  One  can  only  hope 
that  the  character  of  our  art  expositions  will 
change  radically  by  embracing  within  their 
scope  all  the  manifestations  of  art  which  contri- 
bute to  the  beautification  of  even  the  humblest 
dwellings.  In  thus  depriving  art  of  its  character 
of  a  luxury,  we  shall  make  it  an  alleviating  fac- 
tor in  our  life,  free  from  the  taint  of  decadence 


ip6    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

and  arid  privilege.  What  it  means  socially  to 
put  a  desirable  thing  at  the  command  of  the 
masses,  the  modern  automobile  has  demon- 
strated. Once  upon  a  time,  when  prohibitive 
prices  deprived  the  man  of  average  means  of 
having  what  he  instinctively  felt  was  a  sane 
pleasure,  the  rich  automobile  owner  in  his  in- 
evitable predicaments  on  the  roadside  had  to  be 
content  with  the  taunts  and  sneers  of  a  jealous 
mob.  He  had  to  rely  upon  his  own  resources. 
But  now,  with  the  introduction  of  inexpensive 
small  motor  cars,  what  was  once  a  luxury  is  now 
well  nigh  a  necessity.  The  expression  of  social 
friction  by  envious  humans  by  a  lavish  distribu- 
tion of  nails  upon  the  road  has  ceased  to  be  a 
popular  pastime.  So  it  is  with  art.  To  turn 
artistic  ability  exclusively  into  the  Locomobile 
picture  class  has  only  an  exclusive  effect.  The 
thing  that  counts  is  to  spread  the  enjoyment  of 
art  broadly  over  our  common  world.  Every  ma- 
terial, every  detached  object,  first,  and  later  on 
the  walls  and  dwellings  generally,  will  reflect 
some  day,  I  hope,  the  desire  of  men  to  make 
them  alike  beautiful  and  useful.  My  firm  belief 
is  that  art  is  in  the  broader  sense  based  entirely 
on  a  utilitarian  principle,  and  should  exert  itself 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  197 

that  way  in  a  proper  promotive  and  stimulative 
atmosphere.  We  have  accomplished  such  pro- 
digious beginnings  in  this  country,  in  develop- 
ing the  artistic  significance  of  our  dwellings,  that 
I  hope  we  shall  be  leaders  in  future  domestic 
architecture.  In  fact,  I  am  sure  that  our  Ameri- 
can homes  are  on  the  whole  more  tastefully  fur- 
nished than  those  of  Europe.  Our  sense  of  sim- 
plicity and  fitness,  and  a  demand  for  the  practi- 
cal, have  saved  us  from  the  mistakes  of  the  old 
countries,  which  have  never  been  able  to  free 
themselves  completely  from  imitation  of  the 
historic  styles. 

We  must  all  deplore  that  we  have  neglected 
so  far  to  show  the  great  mass  of  original  work 
we  are  doing  as  a  nation  in  the  field  of  the  useful 
arts.  But  the  scattered  evidences  make  one  very 
hungry  for  a  big  comprehensive  x^merican  exhi- 
bition of  the  industrial  arts.  I  have  a  suspicion 
that  it  would  be  even  more  interesting  and  con- 
vincing than  our  surprisingly  good  national  fine 
art.  So  far,  one  still  looks  forward  to  that  event 
with  great  anticipation,  and  I  believe  the  next 
international  exhibition  in  these  United  States 
will  not  be  able  to  sidestep  this  issue  as  deplor- 
ably as  was  done  in  San  Francisco.     The  St. 


ig8    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

Louis  Exposition,  in  1904,  gave  the  American 
public  the  first  comprehensive  idea  of  the  im- 
portance of  national  art  as  demonstrated  in  the 
displays  of  the  German  and  Japanese  peoples. 
To  my  mind,  they  contributed  the  most  inter- 
esting single  units  of  that  great  undertaking, 
notwithstanding  the  fact  that  in  the  Palace  of 
Fine  Arts  no  effort  had  been  spared  to  impress 
with  square  miles  of  ludicrous  paintings  and 
miles  of  linear  feet  of  more  or  less  ugly  frames. 
In  the  meantime,  we  should  not  lose  sight  of  the 
fact  that  we  must  do  our  share  in  the  field  of  the 
industrial  arts. 

That  art  as  related  to  life  not  always  finds  its 
expression  through  the  medium  of  the  picture  is 
shown  abundantly  by  the  great  number  of  very 
artistic  people  who  seldom  come  in  contact  with 
paintings.  We  all  have  had  the  refreshing  ex- 
perience of  meeting  with  all  the  qualities  of  an 
artistic  atmosphere  in  the  most  unexpected 
places,  particularly  where  there  was  no  outward 
indication  of  wealth,  which  so  often  tempts 
people  to  acquire  more  than  the  necessary 
things.  Good  proportion,  true  tonality,  agree- 
able spacing  and  grouping  of  furniture,  proper 
accentuation    of    color,    often    seem    to    work 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  199 

together  in  such  instances  into  a  unity  of  artistic 
atmosphere,  and  we  often  observe  that  the  pres- 
ence of  a  painting  in  such  houses  is  not  the  rule 
but  the  exception.  Almost  all  paintings  in  the 
great  periods  were  painted  for  certain  definite 
positions.  In  our  day  we  have  reached  the  high- 
water  mark  in  the  production  of  detached  and 
portable  paintings,  and  to  watch  the  antics  of 
artist  and  public  alike  in  trying  to  dispose  of 
them  is  surely  amusing,  to  say  the  least,  if  not 
pathetic.  The  fact  alone  that  people  do  not 
know  what  to  do  with  their  paintings  is  a  proof 
of  their  absolute  lack  of  relation  to  everyday 
life,  and  for  luxurious  purposes,  their  number  is 
entirely  out  of  proportion  to  the  available  wall 
space. 

In  the  development  of  this  country's  art,  we 
may  observe  the  same  imitative  procedure  as  in 
anything  else — as  in  our  government  institu- 
tions, our  schools,  or  our  social  system.  As  the 
inauguration  of  our  national  independence  we 
adopted  whatever  happened  to  be  the  vogue  at 
that  particular  time  in  the  mother  countries  of 
our  varied  population.  And  it  is  only  recently 
that  we  are  beginning  to  shape  our  institutions 
to  our  own  needs.    There  are  even  some  people 


200    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

who  are  actually  sacrilegious  enough  to  say  that 
our  laws  and  constitution  are  not  befitting  to 
our  needs,  and  who  wish,  accordingly,  to  change 
them.  With  art  it  is  rapidly  becoming  much 
the  same.  Our  first  pictures  were  a  typical  trans- 
plantation of  English  motives  upon  American 
soil.  Again,  we  were  content  to  borrow  the 
effects  rather  than  to  develop  an  art  of  our  own. 
We  began  with  pictures  right  away,  and  we  have 
stuck  to  them  more  or  less  ever  since.  Instead 
of  trying  to  develop  any  real  national  art  from 
the  soil,  so  to  speak,  we  adopted  a  certain  phase 
of  a  declining  European  easel  picture,  and 
thought  we  had  done  everything  necessary  to  be 
called  artistic.  The  greatest  achievements  in 
art,  however,  do  not  come  about  that  way. 
They  are  the  direct  result  of  a  common  co- 
operative desire  of  all  the  artistic  forces  to  make 
everything  beautiful,  not  merely  to  produce  an 
abstract  expression  of  artistic  impulse  in  one 
form  alone.  It  all  amounts  to  this,  that  as  long 
as  the  necessary  things  in  life  are  not  taken  care 
of  artistically,  the  picture  is  apt  to  be  merely 
an  unhealthy  affectation.  Doubtless  we  are 
producing  too  many  pictures,  largely  for  specu- 
lative purposes,  and  we  are  paying  too  little 


SOBRANTK  VISTA 


I'l.ATI    XXXII 


From  the  Oil  Painting  by 
Eugi  N  Nil  H AUS 

Owned  by 

Mks.  \V.  C.  \\  HITCOMB.Rochclle.  III. 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  201 

attention  to  the  so-called  useful  arts  and  their 
primary  importance  in  our  art  activities. 

Our  first  art  schools  in  this  country,  like  our 
universities,  were  copies  of  European  patterns  of 
the  highest  type  of  education  instead  of  schools 
for  teaching  the  practical,  technical,  useful 
things  needed  at  the  moment.  We  are  acknowl- 
edging the  mistakes  by  the  almost  hysterical 
way  in  which  we  are  providing  technical  schools 
for  teaching  the  things  actually  needed  within  a 
civilization  of  physical  development.  Our  uni- 
versities are  now  really  becoming  American  in- 
stitutions, not  imitations  of  certain  institutions 
abroad,  and  if  the  desire  for  technical  education 
has  become  so  great  as  to  overshadow  the  study 
of  the  classics,  it  is  merely  a  temporary  symp- 
tom, which  will  remedy  itself  with  the  changing 
of  our  industrial  civilization  into  one  more  cul- 
tural. Our  art  schools  are  affected  similarly,  and 
the  change  that  is  taking  place  must  be  re- 
ceived with  joy  by  every  intelligent  citizen. 
While  formerly  we  had  nothing  but  art  acad- 
emies in  this  country,  the  number  of  schools  of 
applied  art  is  increasing  so  rapidly  as  to  assume 
the  right  proportion.  In  England,  and  in 
France,  and  Germany  particularly,  the  propor- 


202    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

tion  of  art  academies  to  industrial  or  applied  art 
schools  is  one  to  ten,  while  in  this  country  it 
was  originally  one  to  nothing.  The  change, 
however,  is  taking  place  rapidly,  with  the 
awakening  of  a  national  understanding  that  the 
art  of  a  great  people  is  not  merely  a  matter  of 
looking  at  pictures  but  a  question  of  living  in 
well-designed  surroundings,  in  houses  which  are 
artistic  primarily  by  reason  of  the  application  of 
aesthetic  principles  to  their  every  detail,  of 
orderly  arranged  and  harmoniously  formed  in- 
teriors and  exteriors  which  reflect  an  under- 
standing of  artistic  principles.  Foreign  critics 
have  been  quite  right  in  their  observation  that 
we  spend  large  amounts  of  money  for  pictures 
and  often  put  them  into  ugly  houses.  It  must 
seem  to  some  that  I  am  again  getting  away 
from  pictures.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  I  am  getting 
/"nearer  to  them  all  along.  A  good  picture  embodies 
certain  artistic  principles  which  we  should  meet 
with  and  desire  everywhere. 

To  return  once  more  to  our  schools — we  are 
about  to  do  what  we  should  have  done  a  hun- 
dred years  ago  if  the  encouragement  coming 
from  Europe  had  been  of  the  right  kind.  When 
we  set  up  housekeeping  in  America  at  the  end 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  203 

of  the  eighteenth  century,  art  in  Europe  had 
started  on  a  downward  march,  only  here  and 
there  relieved  by  symptoms  of  life.  The  interest 
in  the  useful  arts  was  carried  on  only  by  the 
endless  and  meaningless  imitation  of  Renais- 
sance ornamentation.  The  acanthus  was 
worked  to  death,  and  into  a  shapeless  mass. 
The  inevitable  happened  in  a  renewed  interest 
in  original  expressive  art — a  sudden  desire  to 
find  new  and  heretofore  unused  forms  of  orna- 
mental decoration.  Picture-making  suddenly 
was  pushed  into  a  corner.  Many  very  talented 
painters  abroad  saw  the  narrowness  of  their  out- 
look, and  applied  their  talents  to  what  is  prop- 
erly called  design — the  designing  of  useful 
things.  That  is  what  I  hope  will  be  the  privi- 
lege of  our  talented  younger  Americans,  who 
are  working,  often  against  their  own  convic- 
tions, along  the  narrow  lines  laid  down  by  a 
public  which  is  unconsciously  guilty  of  retard- 
ing the  growth  and  universal  spread  of  art.  In 
Europe  and  in  America  art  had  become  so  hope- 
lessly dull,  by  the  end  of  the  last  century,  that 
the  only  thing  that  promised  any  relief  appeared 
to  be  a  return  to  the  artistic  shaping  of  needed 
things.      Picture-making  had  lost  sight  of  its 


204    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

true  aim.  The  Diisseldorf  and  Munich  school 
flourished,  in  anecdotal  pictures  which  had  no 
relation  to  the  sister  arts  of  architecture  and 
sculpture,  having  invaded  the  realm  of  litera- 
ture. 

From  England  this  new  impulse  for  the  beau- 
tification  of  everyday  things  spread  to  Belgium, 
whence  it  went  to  Germany,  and  soon  the  mod- 
ern movement  spread  all  over  Europe.  It 
traveled  like  wildfire,  and  caused  many  local 
artistic  revolutions.  The  old  guard,  finding  that 
all  was  not  well,  fought  furiously  against  the 
new  idea.  The  new  idea  was  first  of  all  a  desire 
to  be  original,  independent  of  the  past.  The 
older  men  agreed  that  this  was  not  possible,  and 
pointed  with  pride  to  the  example  of  the  Renais- 
sance, acknowledged  to  be  the  second  greatest 
period  in  art,  the  greatest  since  Greece;  the 
Renaissance,  they  said,  developed  upon  the 
foundations  of  the  classic  tradition.  Of  course 
this  is  only  partly  correct,  for  the  art  of  the 
Renaissance  is  partly  attributable  to  that  same 
spirit  of  creative  desire  which  caused  our  mod- 
ern movement  in  art  and  which  had  its  be- 
ginning in  the  useful  and  decorative  arts.  The 
spirit  of  independence,  the  desire  to  get  away 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  205 

from  the  past,  arose  simultaneously  in  the  so- 
called  fine  and  applied  arts.  We  are  not  as  yet 
fully  realizing  upon  our  inherent  art  instinct, 
here  in  the  United  States,  as  eventually  we 
shall  be  able  to  do.  In  St.  Louis  in  1904,  as 
already  pointed  out,  the  most  fascinating  artis- 
tic efforts  displayed  were  not  found  in  the  Fine 
Arts  Palace  but  in  another  building,  where  cer- 
tain complete  units,  from  carpets  up  to  pictures, 
were  exhibited  in  separate  buildings  devoted  to 
the  applied  arts.  John  Brisbane  Walker,  at  that 
time  editor  of  T'he  Cosmopolitan^  wrote  a  very 
fine  appreciation  in  his  magazine  of  what  he 
saw  to  be  the  real  art  at  St.  Louis.  In  San 
Francisco,  the  matter  of  grouping  applied  and 
fine  arts  together  was  officially  under  considera- 
tion, and  at  the  last  moment  it  was  decided,  very 
much  to  my  regret,  that  such  a  logical  arrange- 
ment was  impracticable.  Still,  as  many  remem- 
ber, this  was  done  in  part.  Several  of  the  foreign 
nations,  under  no  restrictions  as  to  the  nature 
of  their  art  exhibitions,  and  following  a  custom 
now  well  established  abroad,  did  not  exhibit  ex- 
clusively pictures,  and  they  saved  the  Palace 
of  Fine  Arts  from  what  would  have  been  monot- 
ony.   Japan  had  entrancingly  wonderful  screen 


206    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

pictures,  bronzes,  carvings,  lacquerware,  and  all 
the  practical  art  of  the  Orient,  upon  which  we 
ourselves  are  beginning  to  focus  our  attention. 
China  had  similar  things.  Sweden  had  decorative 
pictures  made  into  wall  hangings,  and  France, 
in  a  building  all  by  itself,  charmed  thousands 
of  people  daily  with  the  most  extraordinarily 
skillful  combination  of  the  beautiful  in  the  ab- 
stract and  in  the  practical-useful.  The  French 
display  was  a  veritable  sermon  of  art.  A  people 
who  can  give  aesthetic  pleasure  in  a  neighborly 
display  of  Gobelins,  perfumes,  porcelains,  and 
pictures,  justly  deserve  our  unstinted  praise  for 
their  artistic  accomplishments. 

In  the  American  section,  the  only  man  working 
in  the  useful  arts  was  Mr.  Louis  Tiffany.  He  was 
seen  with  some  excellent  jewelry  and  decorative 
vases,  all  in  one  case,  in  one  of  the  larger  gal- 
leries. As  for  the  rest  of  the  show,  it  was  a  flood, 
a  sea,  a  veritable  ocean  of  paintings,  and  I  don't 
blame  people  for  getting  tired  of  them.  The 
only  way  I  can  see  to  deal  with  the  great  desire 
of  the  masses  to  appreciate  art  in  the  form  of 
paintings  is  to  teach  tham  first  to  appreciate  the 
beauty  of  a  well-designed  spoon,  and  in  an  evo- 
lutionary way  proceed  from  practical  things  to 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  207 

things  of  a  more  detached  artistic  expression, 
leaving  paintings  to  the  very  end.  In  other 
words,  to  learn  to  appreciate  paintings  is  a 
question  of  beginning  at  the  bottom  of  the 
ladder,  and  learning  to  see  beauty  and  get 
aesthetic  enjoyment  out  of  the  ordinary,  useful 
things.  Nothing  is  more  agonizing  than  to  hear 
expressions  of  so-called  intelligent  interest  be- 
fore some  highly  experimental  and  individual 
pictures,  from  people  who  do  not  understand 
even  the  simplest  kind  of  conventional  picture — 
not  to  speak  of  the  glorious  expression  of  poor 
taste  in  the  clothing  in  which  such  people  often 
parade.  A  person  who  cannot  understand  art 
as  a  principle  in  clothes,  generally  cannot  expect 
to  appreciate  the  same  principle  in  a  picture. 

That  brings  us  right  to  the  crux  of  the  matter. 
Everybody  feels,  then,  the  need  of  a  certain 
principle  to  go  by — certain  means  of  approach. 
Of  course  without  an  understanding  of  those 
principles  there  will  never  be  a  full  enjoyment  of 
art,  and  the  only  thing  to  do  is  to  study  them 
and  try  to  recognize  them  in  a  universal  way. 
These  principles,  of  course,  are  not  new,  as  I 
have  pointed  out,  and  while  I  have  spoken  of 
them  in  previous  discussions,  I  feel  moved  to  say 


208    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

again  that  they  are  universal  conventions,  open 
to  anyone  who  is  willing  to  learn.    These  laws 
certainly  were  not  invented  to  inconvenience 
either  the  public  or  the  artist — on  the  contrary, 
they  owe  their  existence  to  the  fact  that  when 
artists  do  things  in  a  certain  way  this  results  in 
agreeable,   pleasure-giving   effects.      While   we 
have  not  as  yet  shown  any  very  marked  inde- 
pendence, we  have  certainly  developed  original 
opportunities  for  the  study  of  art,  which  I  anti- 
cipate will  aid  materially  in  our  national  artistic 
problems.  In  speaking  of  the  art  schools  of  the 
country,  I  have  referred  to  the  exclusively  tech- 
nical school.     In  concluding,  I  should  like  to 
refer  to  the  modern  American  university,  where 
all   studies,   the   classics,    the   humanities,   the 
sciences,  the  applied  sciences,  and  finally  the 
arts,  have  found  themselves  side  by  side  in  a 
unified  whole.    One  has  to  know  European  in- 
stitutions of  similar  names  but  of  totally  differ- 
ent make-up  to  appreciate  the  advantages  of  our 
young  people.   Now  the  broadest  foundation  for 
an  understanding  and  appreciation  of  all  the  arts 
may  be  secured  entirely  within  one  institution. 
Such  centralization  may  have  its  defects.  I  have 
discovered  none,  however,  though  this  is  sur- 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  209 

prising  in  a  type  of  institution  which  owes  its 
existence  to  expediency  rather  than  to  plan. 
It  is  something  new  under  the  sun,quite  outside 
of  precedent,  but  I  believe  it  will  result  in  a  very 
generous  culture,  not  one-sided,  but  genuine  in 
its  recognition  of  all  phases  of  aesthetic  expres- 
sion. Where  is  the  institution  abroad  where  a 
general  student,  interested  in  art,  could  study 
classical  archaeology,  the  history  of  architecture, 
the  philosophy  of  aesthetics,  the  history  of  cos- 
tume, of  ornament,  the  theory  of  design  and  of 
color,  artistic  anatomy — to  name  the  purely 
theoretical  subjects  alongside  of  practical  ones — 
and  drafting-room  work  of  every  imaginable 
kind,  to  support  and  augment  his  other  studies? 
The  breadth  of  such  work  and  the  possibility  of 
getting  it,  so  to  speak,  under  one  roof,  is  to  me 
one  of  the  most  interesting  elements  of  the 
American  universities. 

The  universality  of  this  all-comprising  teach- 
ing is  at  once  novel  and  effective,  producing  not 
only  people  for  the  professions  outside  of  the  so- 
called  fine  arts,  but  giving  also,  to  a  student  of 
medicine,  for  instance,  or  engineering,  agricul- 
ture, or  chemistry,  opportunity  to  lay  a  founda- 
tion for  an  interest  in  the  finer  things  of  life  that 


2io    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

may  ultimately  become  the  saving  grace  and 
happines  of  his  later  years.  Since  the  great 
majority  of  our  teachers  in  the  public  schools 
system  are  women,  so  far  the  nucleus  of  our  art 
lovers  will  be  found  largely  among  that  sex.  It 
is  possibly  the  refining  and  soothing  element  in 
art  that  is  sometimes  thought  to  appeal  more  to 
women  than  to  men.  At  any  rate,  among  the 
average  student  there  seems  as  yet  to  exist  the 
delusion  that  an  interest  in  art  is  a  confession  of 
mental  and  physical  weakness.  The  average 
young  man  with  aesthetic  appreciation  is  still 
the  exception  in  America,  not  the  rule,  How- 
ever, this  will  change,  with  many  other  things 
which  are  the  heritage  of  a  civilization  where 
physical  strength  was  more  valued  than  spiritual 
power. 

The  important  problems  in  art  education  in 
America  seem  to  me  to  be  these:  First,  to  pro- 
vide in  all  communities  opportunities  for  the 
study  of  the  aesthetic  traditions  of  art,  includ- 
ing those  manifestations  that  disclose  man  en- 
deavoring to  shape  and  express  things  in  such  a 
way  as  to  give  aesthetic  pleasure.  The  general 
museums,  with  its  broad  educational  activities, 
of  which   the  Metropolitan  Museum  in  New 


HOPES  FOR  AMERICAN  ART  211 

York  is  the  most  conspicuous  example,  is  the  in- 
stitution best  fitted  for  this  work.  Such  an  in- 
stitution in  its  beginnings  in  the  smaller  com- 
munities will  eventually  be  nothing  more  and 
nothing  less  than  a  store-house  of  collected 
things  which  may  be  of  interest  largely  from  a 
sentimental  and  historical  character.  The  prop- 
erly classified  and  catalogued  museum  of 
authenticated  and  evaluated  things  is  only  pos- 
sible, generally,  long  after  the  first  stage  has 
laid  a  foundation  for  the  understanding  and 
interest  of  the  next  generation.  The  change 
from  the  first  to  the  next  will  successively  in- 
volve the  employment  of  experts,  which  many 
of  our  museum  directors  as  yet  acarcely  are. 
In  this  regard  we  might  well  go  further,  and 
establish  at  our  larger  museums  schools  for  the 
training  of  museum  directors,  to  supply  the  need 
of  a  profession  which  at  present  is  recruited  from 
every  source.  Second,  we  must  teach  the  masses, 
particularly  through  the  public  school  system, 
to  appreciate  what  we  are  pleased  to  call  the 
applied  or  useful  arts,  or,  to  be  more  logical, 
those  arts  which  do  not  belong  among  the  fine 
or  useless  arts.  Only  then  shall  we  be  able  to 
enjoy  the  full  realization  of  our  artistic  efforts 


212    PAINTERS,  PICTURES  AND  THE  PEOPLE 

when  we  learn  to  understand  art  wherever  it 
exists,  whether  as  an  independent  element,  in 
pictures  and  poetry,  or  in  wall-papers,  a  carpet, 
or  an  illustration.  Our  native  talents  are  so 
numerous  and  endowed  with  such  enthusiasm 
and  energy  that  if  properly  supported  they  will 
yet,  I  am  confident,  give  to  this  country  an  art 
that  will  dominate  the  world.  Our  time  is 
bound  to  come,  and  before  long. 


INDEX 


Abbey,  Edwin  A 46 

Ability  to  Judge  and  Enjoy 6 

Acanthus 25 

Affinity,  Artistic 98 

Agthe,  Kurt 170 

Alexander,  John  W 46 

"Pot  of  Basil" 88 

"Phillis" 88 

"Walt  Whitman" 101 

Rhythm  of 88 

Alma-Tadema,  Sir  Lawrence 148,  149 

Amateur 49 

American  Academy 189 

American  Art  Annual 186 

American  University 208 

Andromeda,  Brush 68 

Apollo 84,  160 

Architect 2,  13 

Architecture 1,11,14,15,65 

Aristocracy,  Patronage  by 176 

Art  Nouveau 24 

Armory  Exhibition  New  York 157 

Art,  Administration 190 

Aims  of 9 

Colonial 181 

Critics 5 

Declining  Periods  of 101 

For  Art's  Sake 152 

Greatest  Period  of 13 

Modern  World  of 16 

Nude,  the,  in (see  chapter  headings) 


214  INDEX 

Art,  continued — 

Patronage  of (see  chapter  headings) 

Significance  of (see  chapter  headings) 

Standards  in 6 

Universality  of 22 

Utilitarian 16 

Balance (see  chapter  headings) 

Barbizon,  Men 124.  *52 

School 52 

Tradition 128 

Baroque  Style 81 

Beal,  Gifford "3 

Belgium 204 

Bellini,  Giovanni 137 

Bellows,  George 116 

Besnard,  Albert 169,  171 

Blanche,  Jacques  Emile 134 

Bocklin,  Arnold 165 

Bolinas  Bay 41 

Boucher,  Francois ]47 

Bouguereau,  W.  Adolphe 164 

Boston 191 

Botticelli,  Sandro 92 

Brangwyn,  Frank 119 

"Breaking  Home  Ties'* 46 

Breckenridge,  Hugh 75>  ll9 

Breughel,  Peter I78 

Brouwer,  Adrian T47>  I7% 

Brush,  George  de  Forest 68,129 

Buffalo  Fine  Arts  Academy 127 

California 39»  83 

Canadian  Rockies 41 

Canon  of  Beauty 160 

Carlsen,  Emil 62,  75,  90 

Carlson,  John  F 4  * 

Carles,  Arthur "9>  I71 


INDEX  215 

Carnegie  Institute 184 

Carriere,  Eugene 94,116,117 

Caser,  Ettore 74 

Ceramics II 

Chabas,  Paul 174 

Chase,  William  Merritt 49,  75,  99,  129 

Chemistry  of  Color  106 

Chicago  Art  Institute 29 

Chicago  Exposition 185 

Church,  Frederic  E 48 

Church,  Patronage  of 177 

China,  Art  of 206 

Cincinnati  Museum 42 

Cleveland  Museum 187 

Clark,  Senator  William  A 189 

Classic  Point  of  View 159 

Classic  Style 14 

Clouds,  Cumulus 82 

Formation 82 

Clubs,  Women's 194 

Color (see  chapter  headings)  7,  12,  66,  105, 107,  in,  119 

Cold  and  Warm 108 

Symbolism  of 105,  108 

Psychology  of 108 

Composition (see  chapter  headings) 

Concarneau 40 

Constable,  John 109,124,151 

Constitution,  American,  Change  of 200 

Connoisseur 3,  34 

Corot,  Jean  Baptiste  Camille 52,74,94,96,112 

Cosmopolitan  Magazine 205 

Crane,  Walter 86 

Crocker  Art  Gallery,  Sacramento 40 

Cubism 39,  95,  105,  131,  153,  154,  155.  »57 

Currier,  Frank 129 

Dachau 41 


216  INDEX 

Dance,  the n 

Davey,  Randall 43,  113 

Dealers 19 

Art,  Commercial  Exploitation  by 17 

Decoration n>23 

Decorative  Pictures 45,  47 

De  Chavannes,  Puvis        .      .  94 

Desert,  The 41 

Design 7 

Deshong  Memorial 187 

Dickens,  Charles 45 

Domes 27 

Dougherty,  Paul 90 

Drama 11,  14 

Dusseldorf  School 45,86,156,204 

Dutch  Painters 142 

Duveneck,  Frank 42,  97,  127,  129 

Easel  Picture 32 

Ecclesiastical  Pictures 138 

Eckmann,  Otto 23 

Egyptians 20,  105 

England,  Art  of 144,  202 

Etaples 40 

Exploitation  of  Art,  Commercial 17 

Literary 5 

Experts,  Museum 211 

Fakers,  Art 1 50 

Fauna  and  Flora 38 

Fechin,  Nicholas 132 

Form  and  Line 12,  66 

Formula  of  Greeks 14 

of  Romans 20 

of  Renaissance 20 

Fountains 16 

Filipino  Art 148 

Fragonard,  Jean  Honore 146 


INDEX  217 

Frames 57,  58»  T98 

France,  Art  of H7>  2o6 

Frieseke,  Frederick  C 113,116,171 

Friends  of  American  Art 185 

Front  Parlor 31 

Frotti no,  126,  128 

Futurism 39.  105»  l3l>  lS6 

Gainsborough,  Sir  Thomas 44>  H3>  '45»  x4° 

Garber,  Daniel 130 

Genius,  Definition  of !03 

Germany 2°4 

Genre 54 

Glackens,  William !7X 

Gobelins 2o6 

Goethe,  Wolfgang  von 44 

Goose  Girl,  Millet *74 

Golgotha 52 

Gothic  Period 26,  149 

Grand  Canon Io2 

Greece '49 

Art  of 20 

Greek  Civilization I3>  x4 

Greeks,  Principles  of  Idealization  of 15 

Examples  of  Art  of 16 

Grisaille  Pictures JI7 

Gross  Gallery,  Peter  A 187 

Gu6rin,  Jules *5>  23 

Gutmann,  Bernard J7° 

Hals,  Franz 17.  43>  *43 

Harmony (see  chapter  headings) 

Harriman,  Mrs 17l 

Harrison,  Birge 4X»  1 82 

Harrison,  Alexander 182 

Hartmann,  Bertram I:9 

Hassam,  Childe 97 

Henri,  Robert "3 


218  INDEX 

Hermitage,  Petrograd 104 

Hill,  Thomas 40 

Hogarth,  William 134,  i44,  i78 

Hokusai o0 

Holland 63 

Homer,  Winslow c  1,  101 

Hondecoter,  Michael ^3 

Hoppner,  John 44>  j^,  146 

Hovenden,  Thomas 46,  70 

Hudson  River  School 50 

Human  Quality  in  Art 54 

Hysteria  About  Old  Masters 139,  140 

Ideal  Democracy o 

Idealization 15,43,44 

Ideas,  Iconoclastic 32 

Illustration 23,  35 

Impotence,  Temperamental 37 

Impressionism 107,113,124,125 

Inness,  George 52,  128,  180 

"Coming  Storm" 127 

"Georgia  Pines" 100 

"Medfield  Meadows" 100 

Innovators,  Art jn 

Interior  Decoration 16 

Investment,  Art 18 

Japan,  Architecture  of 16 

Sculpture  of 17 

Utilitarian  Art  of \(, 

Wood  Carving  of 153 

Japanese  Prints,  Art  of 17,  198 

Johansen,  John 60 

Jordaens,  John 146,  165 

Keith,  William 74.  128 

"Sonoma  Valley" 52 

"Berkeley  Oaks" 52 

Konnen ...     131 


INDEX  219 

Kunst 131 

Kiinstler 13 

Landscape  Gardening 11 

Painter 38, 49 

Laguna  Beach 41 

Lake  Tahoe 41 

Laren 40 

La  Touche,  Gaston 94 

Layman 53,  92 

Lepage,  Bastien 114 

Leonardo  da  Vinci 21,101,123 

Les  Amis  d'Art 185 

Le  Sidaner,  Henri 42,  130 

Levy,  Florence 186 

Lindenthal  Bridge 28 

Los  Angeles  Museum 187 

Luxembourg 42 

Macbeth,  William 192 

Madonnas 80,  139 

Madrid 87 

Manet,  Edouard 152 

Maybeck,  Bernard 19 

Marin  County,  California 41 

Mathews,  Arthur  F 48,114,174 

Melchers,  Gari 123 

"Mother  and  Child" 100 

"Maternity" 61 

"Smithy" 61 

Metcalf,  VVillard,  "Trembling  Leaves" 130 

Metsu,  Gabriel I4a 

Metropolitan  Museum 210 

Merci£,  Antoine 169 

Michel  Angelo  Buonarotti 21,99,102 

Millet,  Jean  Francis,  "  Goose  Girl" 174 

Minneapolis  Institute  of  Arts 187 

Mission  Furniture 3° 


220  INDEX 

Moore,  Albert 86 

Mona  Lisa 123 

Monet,  Claude 118,124,152 

Monotony 95 

Morris,  William 24,  144 

Mullgardt,  Louis,  "Court  of  Abundance" 19 

Munich 204 

School  of 45 

Munkaczy,  Michael,  "Golgotha" 52 

Mutual  Admiration  Societies 150 

Mural  Painting 27 

Murillo,  Bartolome  Esteban 116 

Murphy,  Herman  Dudley 57 

Museums 190 

of  Monstrocities 31 

Music 1,11,12,36 

Color  and 106 

Niagara 48 

Nature 57 

Copying  of 51 

Rhythm  in 82,  83 

What  the  Artist  Takes  Out  of 53 

Neo-Impressionism 125,  129 

Neilson,  Raymond,  P.  R 113 

Nelson,  Bruce 48 

Nude,  American  Saloon 164 

Old  Masters 139 

Orient,  Art  of 47,  206 

Outdoor  Painting 124 

Paintre  Artiste 13 

Panama-Pacific  International  Exposition        .      .     15,  19,  159,  166,  192 

Parrish,  Maxfield 23 

Pawhuska  Art  Club 188 

Pearson,  Joseph  T.,  "In  the  Valley" 48 

Pennsylvania  Academy  of  Fine  Arts    .  .      • 185 

Peters,  Charles  Rollo 74 


INDEX  221 

Perspective,  Linear,  Aerial 8o,  81 

Phidias 21 

Photography,  Handicaps  in 44 

Pictures,  Naturalistic 45 

Decorative 45 

Pinakothek,  Munich 71 

Pissarro 152 

Pittsburg 184 

Pleinairist 113,  129 

Poetry 1,11,12,14 

Pope  Sixtus 70 

Portraits 49 

Colonial 18 

Portuguese  Art 167 

Post-Impressionism 39,  n 6,  156,  157 

Pottery,  American 18 

Pre-Raphaelites 86 

Prints,  Japanese 17 

Psychic,  Realm  of 152 

Public,  Attitude  of  the 1 

Voting  Contests  of 34 

Views  About  Art 2 

Whims  of  the 2 

Putz,  Leo,  "I  ady  by  the  Shore" 132 

Puritans     .  I42»  ^73 

Pyle,  Howard 23 

Raphael,  Sanzio 21,116,123 

Realism 43 

Reid,  Robert 171,  172 

Redfield,  Edward  W 97,  131 

Religious  Paintings I39>177 

Rembrandt,  Van  Ryn     .  99,  I42 

"Anatomy  Lesson" 87 

Luminosity  of no 

"Man  with  the  Helmet" 101 

"Polish  Nobleman" 104 


222  INDEX 

Renaissance 20,  25,  80,  149 

Madonnas m 

Patronage 176 

Renoir,  Auguste 152 

Reynolds,  Sir  Joshua 44,51,143,145,146 

Rhythm (see  chapter  headings) 

Ritschel,  William 62,  90 

Robinson,  Charles  Dorman 40 

Romney,  George 44,  143 

Rousseau,  Theodore  Etienne 94 

Rossetti,  Dante  Gabriel 86 

Rubens,  Peter  Paul         93,  112,   107,   146,  166 

"Descent  from  the  Cross" 71 

"Rape  of  the  Daughters  of  Leucippus" 71 

Rug,  Oriental 12 

San  Francisco  City  Hall 27 

Saint  Gaudens  Museum 187 

Saint  Louis  Exposition 186,  198,  205 

Solomon,  Solomon  S 134 

Sargent,  John  Singer 49,  129,  134,  172 

Scenic  Wonders 41 

Sculpture i,  11 

Schools  of  Applied  Art 201 

"September  Morning" 174 

Sforza,  Ludovico 21 

Shannon,  James  Jebusa 134 

Signorelli,  Luca,  "Education  of  Pan" 71 

Simplicity 101 

Simon,  Lucien 170 

Simmons  Museum 187 

Sistine  Madonna 69 

Skill  in  Painting 122,  133 

Sketching  Grounds 63 

Snyders,  Franz 166 

Spencer,  Robert 130 

Steen,  Jan 142   147   178 


INDEX  223 

Stella 166 

Stuart,  Gilbert 18 

Style,  Classic 160 

Personal 97 

Subjects,  Literatesque 46 

Sunset 85 

Swing,  Rhythm 84 

Talent,  Definition  of 103 

Tarbell,  Edmund  C 97 

"Girl  Mending" 101 

Technique  of  Painting 120,123 

Teniers,  David 142,  *47 

Terborch,  Gerhard H2 

"Musician" 104 

Texture,  Definition  of 123,143 

Thaulow,  Fritz 97 

Thedy,  Max,  "  Dutch  Girl" 126 

Tiepolo,  Giovanni  Domenico 107,117 

Tiffany,  Louis 206 

Tintoretto,  Tocopo  Robusti 123 

"Origin  of  Milky  Way" 71 

Titian,  Vecellio 99,107,117,181 

"Entombment" 71 

"Sacred  and  Profane  Love" 71 

"Man  with  Glove" 101 

Tito,  Ettore,  "Centaur  and  Nymphs" 69 

Tonal  Pictures »3»  "4 

Travertine  Surfaces 15 

Troccoli,  Giovanni  Battista I2q 

Truth,  Photographic 3° 

Turner,  John  M.  W 44 

Twachtman,  John 95 

University,  Modern  American 209 

Useful  Arts 29 

Useless  Arts 29 

Utopia,  Artist's ,      , 3 


224  INDEX 

Utilitarianism  of  Art 24 

Van  Dyck,  Sir  Anthony 107,  145,  146 

Velasquez,  Diego  Rodriguez  de  Silva        .      .    87,99,102,123,134,141 

Venus 84,  160 

Ver  Mehr  von  Delft i42 

Ville  d'Avray 52 

Wadsworth  Athenaeum 186 

Walker,  John  Brisbane 205 

Watteau,  Antoine 146    181 

Watts,  George  F.,  "Sir  Galahad" 188 

Water,  Rhythmic oo 

Watson  Memorial  Museum 187 

Waugh,  Frederic go 

Weenix,  Jan J42 

Whistling  Boy,  Duveneck 127 

Whistler,  James  A.  McNeill      .      .      .44,49,93,112,114,116,132,134 

"Mother" gg 

Woodbury,  Charles  H oo 

Woodstock 4I 

Woolworth  Building 28 

"Woman  with  the  Shawl,"  Chase oo 

Woman  Teachers 210 

'Yosemite  Valley  " .0 


V 


\ 


OF  CAl 


O    V8V98VS    ViNVS    a 


\ 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


/ 


ukol! 


uo 


fl 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


\ 


/ 


B 


\ 


U£ 


°   SANTA  BARB  a 


W 


QD 


/ 


\